Document undocumented linker command line options.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
2571583a 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
2571583a 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
2571583a 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
387dd777
DP
831@kindex -plugin @var{name}
832@item -plugin @var{name}
833Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
834the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
835automatically added by the complier, when using link time
836optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
837wish.
838
839Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
840from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
841@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
842those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
843copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
844based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
845just copy in the newest one.
846
26278bb8
UD
847@kindex --push-state
848@cindex push state governing input file handling
849@item --push-state
850The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
851flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
852restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
853
854The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
855@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
856@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
857@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
858@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
859@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
860
861One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
862used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
863listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
864something as follows:
865
866@smallexample
867-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
868@end smallexample
869
870@kindex --pop-state
871@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 872@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
873Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
874flags governing input file handling.
875
a712da20
NC
876@kindex -q
877@kindex --emit-relocs
878@cindex retain relocations in final executable
879@item -q
880@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 881Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
882Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
883order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
884in larger executables.
885
dbab7a7b
NC
886This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
887
4f471f39
RS
888@kindex --force-dynamic
889@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
890@item --force-dynamic
891Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
892to VxWorks targets.
893
252b5132
RH
894@cindex partial link
895@cindex relocatable output
896@kindex -r
1049f94e 897@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 898@item -r
1049f94e 899@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 900Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 901turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
902linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
903magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
904@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 905@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
906If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
907linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
908constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
909
62bf86b4
HPN
910When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
911partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
912relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
913example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
914with input files in other formats at all.
915
252b5132
RH
916This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
917
918@kindex -R @var{file}
919@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
920@cindex symbol-only input
921@item -R @var{filename}
922@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
923Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
924relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
925to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
926programs. You may use this option more than once.
927
ff5dcc92 928For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 929followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 930the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
931
932@kindex -s
933@kindex --strip-all
934@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 935@item -s
252b5132
RH
936@itemx --strip-all
937Omit all symbol information from the output file.
938
939@kindex -S
940@kindex --strip-debug
941@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 942@item -S
252b5132
RH
943@itemx --strip-debug
944Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
945
a70f34c0
NC
946@kindex --strip-discarded
947@kindex --no-strip-discarded
948@item --strip-discarded
949@itemx --no-strip-discarded
950Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
951Enabled by default.
952
252b5132
RH
953@kindex -t
954@kindex --trace
955@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 956@item -t
252b5132 957@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 958Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
959
960@kindex -T @var{script}
961@kindex --script=@var{script}
962@cindex script files
963@item -T @var{scriptfile}
964@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
965Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 966@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 967@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
968output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
969the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
970specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
971options accumulate.
252b5132 972
14be8564
L
973@kindex -dT @var{script}
974@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
975@cindex script files
976@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
977@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
978Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
979
980This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
981processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
982command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
983@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
984behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
985command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
986the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
987@samp{gcc}).
988
252b5132
RH
989@kindex -u @var{symbol}
990@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
991@cindex undefined symbol
992@item -u @var{symbol}
993@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
994Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
995symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
996modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
997different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
998option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
999
0a618243
AB
1000If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1001into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1002undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1003instead.
1004
1005@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1006@cindex symbols, require defined
1007@cindex defined symbol
1008@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1009Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1010is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1011is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1012and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1013@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1014can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1015
252b5132
RH
1016@kindex -Ur
1017@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1018@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1019For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1020@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1021turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1022@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1023It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1024with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1025be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1026@samp{-r} for the others.
1027
c005eb9e
AB
1028@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1029@cindex orphan sections
1030@cindex sections, orphan
1031@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1032Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1033specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1034
1035@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1036
1037@table @code
1038@item place
1039Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1040the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1041@samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1042
1043@item discard
1044All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1045@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1046
1047@item warn
1048The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1049issue a warning.
1050
1051@item error
1052The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1053@end table
1054
1055The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1056
577a0623
AM
1057@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1058@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1059Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1060@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1061missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1062specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1063multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1064input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1065in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1066
252b5132
RH
1067@kindex -v
1068@kindex -V
1069@kindex --version
1070@cindex version
1071@item -v
1072@itemx --version
1073@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1074Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1075lists the supported emulations.
1076
1077@kindex -x
1078@kindex --discard-all
1079@cindex deleting local symbols
1080@item -x
1081@itemx --discard-all
1082Delete all local symbols.
1083
1084@kindex -X
1085@kindex --discard-locals
1086@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1087@item -X
252b5132 1088@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1089Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1090system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1091or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1092
1093@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1094@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1095@cindex symbol tracing
1096@item -y @var{symbol}
1097@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1098Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1099option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1100to prepend an underscore.
1101
1102This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1103don't know where the reference is coming from.
1104
1105@kindex -Y @var{path}
1106@item -Y @var{path}
1107Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1108for Solaris compatibility.
1109
1110@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1111@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1112The recognized keywords are:
1113@table @samp
1114
1115@item combreloc
1116Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1117lookup caching possible.
1118
b8871f35
L
1119@item common
1120Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1121link.
1122
cd6d6c15 1123@item defs
560e09e9 1124Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1125shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1126
6aa29e7b
JJ
1127@item execstack
1128Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1129
b039ef04
L
1130@item global
1131This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1132the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1133of subsequently loaded libraries.
1134
cd6d6c15
NC
1135@item initfirst
1136This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1137It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1138before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1139the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1140the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1141objects.
1142
1143@item interpose
1144Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1145but the primary executable.
1146
5fa222e4
AM
1147@item lazy
1148When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1149dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1150the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1151Lazy binding is the default.
1152
cd6d6c15
NC
1153@item loadfltr
1154Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1155runtime.
1156
1157@item muldefs
1158Allows multiple definitions.
1159
1160@item nocombreloc
1161Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1162
b8871f35
L
1163@item nocommon
1164Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1165link.
1166
cd6d6c15 1167@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1168Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1169defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1170
1171@item nodefaultlib
1172Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1173ignore any default library search paths.
1174
1175@item nodelete
1176Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1177
1178@item nodlopen
1179Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1180
1181@item nodump
1182Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1183
6aa29e7b
JJ
1184@item noexecstack
1185Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1186
8dfef1bd
L
1187@item text
1188Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1189
1190@item notext
1191Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1192
1193@item textoff
1194Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1195
6aa29e7b
JJ
1196@item norelro
1197Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1198
cd6d6c15
NC
1199@item now
1200When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1201dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1202when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1203deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1204first called.
1205
1206@item origin
1207Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1208
6aa29e7b
JJ
1209@item relro
1210Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1211
24718e3b
L
1212@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1213Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1214
1215@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1216Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1217
04c3a755
NS
1218@item stack-size=@var{value}
1219Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1220Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1221@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1222
d258b828
IZ
1223@item bndplt
1224Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1225
889c2a67
L
1226@item noextern-protected-data
1227Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1228library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1229to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1230generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
4dba69b9 1231module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
889c2a67
L
1232i386 and x86-64.
1233
aec6b87e
L
1234@item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1235Don't treat undefined weak symbols as dynamic when building executable.
1236This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used to avoid
1237dynamic relocations against undefined weak symbols in executable.
1238Supported for i386 and x86-64.
1239
4c10bbaa
L
1240@item noreloc-overflow
1241Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1242relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1243overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1244
caa65211
L
1245@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1246@itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1247@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1248@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1249@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1250Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1251to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1252@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1253@option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1254@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1255@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1256@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1257Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1258
cd6d6c15
NC
1259@end table
1260
ece2d90e 1261Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1262
1263@kindex -(
1264@cindex groups of archives
1265@item -( @var{archives} -)
1266@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1267The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1268either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1269
1270The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1271references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1272the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1273archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1274object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1275would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1276they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1277resolved.
1278
1279Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1280it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1281more archives.
1282
69da35b5
NC
1283@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1284@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1285@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1286@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1287Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1288recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1289and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1290the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1291behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1292so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1293restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1294
4a43e768
AM
1295@kindex --as-needed
1296@kindex --no-as-needed
1297@item --as-needed
1298@itemx --no-as-needed
1299This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1300on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1301the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1302on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1303needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1304emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1305non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1306the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1307non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1308Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1309the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1310needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1311from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1312
e56f61be
L
1313@kindex --add-needed
1314@kindex --no-add-needed
1315@item --add-needed
1316@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1317These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1318their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1319options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1320and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1321
252b5132
RH
1322@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1323@item -assert @var{keyword}
1324This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1325
1326@kindex -Bdynamic
1327@kindex -dy
1328@kindex -call_shared
1329@item -Bdynamic
1330@itemx -dy
1331@itemx -call_shared
1332Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1333for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1334default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1335for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1336multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1337@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1338
a1ab1d2a
UD
1339@kindex -Bgroup
1340@item -Bgroup
1341Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1342section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1343object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1344@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1345only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1346
252b5132
RH
1347@kindex -Bstatic
1348@kindex -dn
1349@kindex -non_shared
1350@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1351@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1352@itemx -dn
1353@itemx -non_shared
1354@itemx -static
1355Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1356platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1357variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1358may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1359library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1360option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1361option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1362shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1363references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1364libraries.
252b5132
RH
1365
1366@kindex -Bsymbolic
1367@item -Bsymbolic
1368When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1369definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1370for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1371within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1372@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1373executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1374the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1375support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1376
40b36307
L
1377@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1378@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1379When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1380symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1381This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1382when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1383to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1384This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1385libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1386
55255dae
L
1387@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1388@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1389Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1390typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1391global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1392within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1393to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1394in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1395which support shared libraries.
1396
1397The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1398scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1399
40b36307
L
1400@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1401@item --dynamic-list-data
1402Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1403
1404@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1405@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1406Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1407is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1408
0b8a70d9
L
1409@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1410@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1411Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1412
252b5132
RH
1413@kindex --check-sections
1414@kindex --no-check-sections
1415@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1416@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1417Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1418been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1419perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1420suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1421allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1422restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1423Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1424force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1425option.
252b5132 1426
ddbb8a31
NC
1427@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1428@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1429@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1430@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1431This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1432by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1433command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1434output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1435input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1436specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1437follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1438behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1439
1440This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1441libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1442mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1443their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1444required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1445the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1446dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1447symbols.
1448
252b5132
RH
1449@cindex cross reference table
1450@kindex --cref
1451@item --cref
1452Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1453generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1454Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1455
1456The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1457easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1458sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1459symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1460definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1461where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1462symbol are listed.
252b5132 1463
4818e05f
AM
1464@cindex common allocation
1465@kindex --no-define-common
1466@item --no-define-common
1467This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1468The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1469@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1470
1471The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1472the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1473of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1474forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1475Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1476from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1477This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1478and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1479duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1480paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1481
252b5132 1482@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1483@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1484@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1485Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1486address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1487times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1488limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1489context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1490symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1491constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1492using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1493@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1494equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1495
1496@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1497@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1498@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1499@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1500@itemx --no-demangle
1501These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1502and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1503present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1504underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1505mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1506different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1507to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1508demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1509is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1510
1511@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1512@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1513@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1514@item -I@var{file}
1515@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1516Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1517generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1518linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1519doing.
1520
9b8b325a
RF
1521@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1522@item --no-dynamic-linker
1523When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1524linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1525executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1526entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1527
a70f34c0
NC
1528@kindex --embedded-relocs
1529@item --embedded-relocs
1530This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1531that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1532is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1533targets.
1534
7ce691ae 1535@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1536@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1537@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1538@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1539Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1540with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1541
252b5132
RH
1542@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1543@item --force-exe-suffix
1544Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1545
1546If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1547@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1548the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1549option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1550Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1551it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1552
1553@kindex --gc-sections
1554@kindex --no-gc-sections
1555@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1556@item --gc-sections
1557@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1558Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1559targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1560performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1561@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1562collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1563implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1564
d5465ba2
AM
1565@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1566examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1567symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1568command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1569referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1570libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1571referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1572the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1573relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1574
ac69cbc6 1575This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1576@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1577specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1578a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1579
c17d87de
NC
1580@kindex --print-gc-sections
1581@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1582@cindex garbage collection
1583@item --print-gc-sections
1584@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1585List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1586printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1587collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1588default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1589be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1590line.
1591
22185505 1592@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1593@cindex garbage collection
1594@item --gc-keep-exported
1595When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1596collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1597default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1598executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1599collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1600Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1601it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1602ELF format targets.
1603
30824704
RM
1604@kindex --print-output-format
1605@cindex output format
1606@item --print-output-format
1607Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1608other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1609in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1610
3604cb1f
TG
1611@kindex --print-memory-usage
1612@cindex memory usage
1613@item --print-memory-usage
1614Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1615the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1616quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1617headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1618parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1619
1620@smallexample
1621Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1622 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1623 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1624@end smallexample
1625
252b5132
RH
1626@cindex help
1627@cindex usage
1628@kindex --help
1629@item --help
1630Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1631
ea20a7da
CC
1632@kindex --target-help
1633@item --target-help
1634Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1635
2509a395
SL
1636@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1637@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1638Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1639@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1640
1641@cindex memory usage
1642@kindex --no-keep-memory
1643@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1644@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1645symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1646instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1647necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1648while linking a large executable.
1649
1650@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1651@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1652@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1653@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1654Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1655is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1656The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1657behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1658libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1659
aa713662
L
1660@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1661@kindex -z muldefs
1662@item --allow-multiple-definition
1663@itemx -z muldefs
1664Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1665report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1666first definition will be used.
1667
b79e8c78 1668@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1669@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1670@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1671@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1672Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1673This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1674determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1675shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1676how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1677
903249d7
NC
1678The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1679referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1680an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1681a shared library.
1682
1683The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1684libraries specified at link time are that:
1685
1686@itemize @bullet
1687@item
1688A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1689that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1690resolvable at load time.
1691@item
1692There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1693symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1694
1695The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1696select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1697architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1698appropriate memset function.
1699@end itemize
b79e8c78 1700
31941635
L
1701@kindex --no-undefined-version
1702@item --no-undefined-version
1703Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1704it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1705will be issued instead.
1706
3e3b46e5
PB
1707@kindex --default-symver
1708@item --default-symver
1709Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1710exported symbols.
1711
1712@kindex --default-imported-symver
1713@item --default-imported-symver
1714Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1715imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1716
252b5132
RH
1717@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1718@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1719Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1720files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1721been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1722This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1723errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1724have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1725inappropriate.
1726
fe7929ce
AM
1727@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1728@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1729Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1730library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1731
252b5132
RH
1732@kindex --no-whole-archive
1733@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1734Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1735archive files.
1736
1737@cindex output file after errors
1738@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1739@item --noinhibit-exec
1740Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1741Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1742errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1743when it issues any error whatsoever.
1744
0a9c1c8e
CD
1745@kindex -nostdlib
1746@item -nostdlib
1747Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1748command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1749(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1750
252b5132 1751@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1752@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1753@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1754@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1755file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1756@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1757object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1758object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1759should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1760usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1761name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1762list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1763command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1764this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1765@end ifclear
1766
76359541
TP
1767@kindex --out-implib
1768@item --out-implib @var{file}
1769Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1770the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1771library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1772may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1773behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1774step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1775the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1776
36af4a4e
JJ
1777@kindex -pie
1778@kindex --pic-executable
1779@item -pie
1780@itemx --pic-executable
1781@cindex position independent executables
1782Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1783ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1784libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1785address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1786normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1787defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1788
252b5132
RH
1789@kindex -qmagic
1790@item -qmagic
1791This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1792
1793@kindex -Qy
1794@item -Qy
1795This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1796
1797@kindex --relax
1798@cindex synthesizing linker
1799@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1800@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1801@item --relax
28d5f677 1802@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1803An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1804@ifset GENERIC
1805This option is only supported on a few targets.
1806@end ifset
1807@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1808@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1809@end ifset
1810@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1811@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1812@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1813@ifset XTENSA
1814@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1815@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1816@ifset M68HC11
1817@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1818@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1819@ifset NIOSII
1820@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1821@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1822@ifset POWERPC
1823@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1824@end ifset
252b5132 1825
28d5f677
NC
1826On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1827global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1828addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1829synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1830instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1831
1832On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1833debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1834@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1835This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1836family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1837@end ifset
1838
1839@ifset GENERIC
1840On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1841but ignored.
1842@end ifset
1843
28d5f677
NC
1844On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1845@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1846
252b5132
RH
1847@cindex retaining specified symbols
1848@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1849@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1850@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1851@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1852Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1853discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1854symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1855@ifset GENERIC
1856(such as VxWorks)
1857@end ifset
1858where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1859run-time memory.
1860
1861@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1862or symbols needed for relocations.
1863
1864You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1865line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1866
1867@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1868@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1869@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1870@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1871Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1872linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1873arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1874them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1875also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1876objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1877@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1878ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1879@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1880
ff5dcc92 1881The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1882SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1883@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1884runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1885options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1886gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1887file systems.
252b5132 1888
ff5dcc92 1889For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1890followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1891the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1892@end ifset
1893
1894@ifset GENERIC
1895@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1896@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1897@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1898When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1899happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1900of the input files.
1901
1902When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1903non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1904shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1905explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1906specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1907@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1908either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1909appearing multiple times.
1910
e680a6b6
NC
1911The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1912directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1913containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1914and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
191564-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1916
1917The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1918@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1919supported.
1920
28c309a2
NC
1921This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1922that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1923is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1924runtime linker would do.
1925
252b5132 1926The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1927libraries:
252b5132
RH
1928@enumerate
1929@item
ff5dcc92 1930Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1931@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1932Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1933between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1934specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1935used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1936at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1937by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1938the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1939@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1940On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1941@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1942environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1943@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1944On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1945directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1946@item
a1b8d843 1947For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1948variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1949@item
ec4eb78a
L
1950For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1951@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1952libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1953@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1954@item
252b5132
RH
1955The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1956@item
1957For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1958exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1959@end enumerate
1960
1961If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1962warning and continue with the link.
1963@end ifset
1964
1965@kindex -shared
1966@kindex -Bshareable
1967@item -shared
1968@itemx -Bshareable
1969@cindex shared libraries
1970Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1971and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1972shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1973undefined symbols in the link.
1974
252b5132 1975@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1976@item --sort-common
1977@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1978@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1979This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1980ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1981sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1982eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1983between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1984specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1985
2509a395
SL
1986@kindex --sort-section=name
1987@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1988This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1989patterns in the linker script.
1990
2509a395
SL
1991@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1992@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1993This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1994patterns in the linker script.
1995
a70f34c0
NC
1996@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
1997@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
1998This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
1999.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2000post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2001
252b5132 2002@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2003@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2004Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2005each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2006size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2007
2008@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2009@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2010Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2011output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2012This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2013certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2014cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2015that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2016support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2017input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2018more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2019many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2020
2021@kindex --stats
2022@item --stats
2023Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2024as execution time and memory usage.
2025
2509a395 2026@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2027@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2028Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2029configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2030that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2031
a70f34c0
NC
2032@kindex --task-link
2033@item --task-link
2034This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2035file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2036
252b5132
RH
2037@kindex --traditional-format
2038@cindex traditional format
2039@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2040For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2041the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2042use the traditional format instead.
2043
2044@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2045For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2046symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2047full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2048@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2049trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2050combine duplicate entries.
2051
2509a395
SL
2052@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2053@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2054Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2055address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2056times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2057line.
2058@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2059for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2060@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2061should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2062sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2063
2509a395
SL
2064@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2065@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2066@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2067@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2068@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2069@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2070@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2071Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2072@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2073
2509a395
SL
2074@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2075@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2076@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2077When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2078byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2079
9d5777a3
RM
2080@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2081@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2082@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2083When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2084the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2085text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2086
0d705e9f
AM
2087@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2088@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2089@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2090When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2091model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2092
560e09e9
NC
2093@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2094@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2095Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2096values for @samp{method}:
2097
2098@table @samp
2099@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2100Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2101
2102@item report-all
da8bce14 2103Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2104
2105@item ignore-in-object-files
2106Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2107ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2108
2109@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2110Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2111ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2112when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2113libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2114command line.
2115@end table
2116
2117The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2118by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2119
2120Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2121unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2122can change this to a warning.
2123
1715a13c
L
2124@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2125@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2126@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2127@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2128Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2129supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2130the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2131argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2132
2133@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2134@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2135@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2136Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2137used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2138about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2139is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2140see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2141use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2142symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2143@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2144
7ce691ae 2145@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2146@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2147@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2148@item --warn-common
2149Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2150a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2151but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2152you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2153Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2154warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2155
2156There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2157
2158@table @samp
2159@item int i = 1;
2160A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2161file.
2162
2163@item extern int i;
2164An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2165There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2166variable somewhere.
2167
2168@item int i;
2169A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2170variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2171The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2172single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2173size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2174a definition of the same variable.
2175@end table
2176
2177The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2178Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2179just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2180encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2181a common symbol.
2182
2183@enumerate
2184@item
2185Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2186definition for the symbol.
2187@smallexample
2188@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2189 overridden by definition
2190@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2191@end smallexample
2192
2193@item
2194Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2195the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2196except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2197@smallexample
2198@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2199 overriding common
2200@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2201@end smallexample
2202
2203@item
2204Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2205@smallexample
2206@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2207 of `@var{symbol}'
2208@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2209@end smallexample
2210
2211@item
2212Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2213@smallexample
2214@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2215 overridden by larger common
2216@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2217@end smallexample
2218
2219@item
2220Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2221the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2222encountered in a different order.
2223@smallexample
2224@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2225 overriding smaller common
2226@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2227@end smallexample
2228@end enumerate
2229
2230@kindex --warn-constructors
2231@item --warn-constructors
2232Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2233object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2234detect the use of global constructors.
2235
2236@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2237@item --warn-multiple-gp
2238Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2239This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2240Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2241section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2242of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2243base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2244base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2245bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2246large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2247values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2248option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2249
2250@kindex --warn-once
2251@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2252@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2253@item --warn-once
2254Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2255which refers to it.
2256
2257@kindex --warn-section-align
2258@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2259@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2260@item --warn-section-align
2261Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2262alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2263The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2264is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2265the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2266
8fdd7217
NC
2267@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2268@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2269Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2270
a0c402a5
L
2271@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2272@item --warn-alternate-em
2273Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2274
560e09e9
NC
2275@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2276@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2277If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2278@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2279This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2280
2281@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2282@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2283This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2284it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2285
252b5132
RH
2286@kindex --whole-archive
2287@cindex including an entire archive
2288@item --whole-archive
2289For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2290@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2291in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2292files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2293library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2294library. This option may be used more than once.
2295
7ec229ce 2296Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2297about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2298Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2299list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2300your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2301
2509a395
SL
2302@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2303@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2304Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2305@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2306undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2307@var{symbol}.
2308
2309This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2310wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2311wishes to call the system function, it should call
2312@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2313
2314Here is a trivial example:
2315
2316@smallexample
2317void *
cc2f008e 2318__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2319@{
cc2f008e 2320 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2321 return __real_malloc (c);
2322@}
2323@end smallexample
2324
ff5dcc92 2325If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2326all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2327instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2328call the real @code{malloc} function.
2329
2330You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2331links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2332you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2333file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2334call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2335
6aa29e7b 2336@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2337@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2338@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2339@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2340Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2341(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2342section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2343
e41b3a13
JJ
2344@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2345@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2346Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2347generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2348if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2349
6c1439be
L
2350@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2351@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2352@item --enable-new-dtags
2353@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2354This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2355systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2356@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2357and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2358If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2359created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2360those options are only available for ELF systems.
2361
2d643429 2362@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2363@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2364Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2365close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2366time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2367increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2368value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2369
fdc90cb4
JJ
2370@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2371@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2372Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2373@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2374new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2375the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2376hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2377
0ce398f1
L
2378@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2379@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2380@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2381@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2382@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2383@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2384@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2385@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2386On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2387compressed using zlib.
2388
2389@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2390sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2391DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2392instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2393also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2394sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2395
2396The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2397@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2398
2399Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2400sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2401for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2402uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2403
2404The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2405involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2406default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2407@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2408
35835446
JR
2409@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2410@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2411This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2412linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2413for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2414about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2415
4f9c04f7 2416Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 24171021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2418run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2419has been used.
2420
2421The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2422enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2423
c0065db7
RM
2424@kindex --build-id
2425@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2426@item --build-id
2427@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2428Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2429or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2430unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2431@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2432@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2433@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2434the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2435string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2436@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2437is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2438
2439The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2440that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2441unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2442to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2443file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2444string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2445
2446Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2447@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2448@end table
2449
0285c67d
NC
2450@c man end
2451
36f63dca 2452@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2453
0285c67d
NC
2454@c man begin OPTIONS
2455
ff5dcc92 2456The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2457the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2458normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2459use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2460@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2461like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2462symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2463object file).
2464
2465In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2466support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2467PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2468values by either a space or an equals sign.
2469
ff5dcc92 2470@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2471
2472@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2473@item --add-stdcall-alias
2474If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2475as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2476[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2477
2478@kindex --base-file
2479@item --base-file @var{file}
2480Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2481addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2482@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2483[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2484
2485@kindex --dll
2486@item --dll
2487Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2488@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2489file.
bb10df36 2490[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2491
88183869
DK
2492@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2493@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2494@item --enable-long-section-names
2495@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2496The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2497the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2498for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2499fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2500to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2501allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2502disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2503generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2504as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2505with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2506GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2507information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2508option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2509section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2510when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2511image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2512[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2513
252b5132
RH
2514@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2515@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2516@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2517@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2518If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2519do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2520only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2521resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2522undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2523@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2524to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2525warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2526import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2527to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2528feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2529@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2530mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2531[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2532
522f09cd
KT
2533@kindex --leading-underscore
2534@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2535@item --leading-underscore
2536@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2537For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2538in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2539disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2540
252b5132
RH
2541@cindex DLLs, creating
2542@kindex --export-all-symbols
2543@item --export-all-symbols
2544If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2545be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2546otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2547explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2548attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2549option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2550@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2551@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2552exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2553re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2554such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2555@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2556@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2557Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2558not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2559extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2560(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2561These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2562@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2563@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2564@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2565@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2566[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2567
2568@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2569@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2570Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2571exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2572[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2573
2927aaca
NC
2574@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2575@item --exclude-all-symbols
2576Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2577[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2578
252b5132
RH
2579@kindex --file-alignment
2580@item --file-alignment
2581Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2582file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2583512.
bb10df36 2584[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2585
2586@cindex heap size
2587@kindex --heap
2588@item --heap @var{reserve}
2589@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2590Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2591to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2592committed.
bb10df36 2593[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2594
2595@cindex image base
2596@kindex --image-base
2597@item --image-base @var{value}
2598Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2599the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2600is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2601your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2602other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2603for dlls.
bb10df36 2604[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2605
2606@kindex --kill-at
2607@item --kill-at
2608If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2609symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2610[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2611
26d2d8a2
BF
2612@kindex --large-address-aware
2613@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2614If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2615header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2616greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2617or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2618section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2619[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2620
f69a2f97
NC
2621@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2622@item --disable-large-address-aware
2623Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2624This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2625driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2626addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2627[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2628
252b5132
RH
2629@kindex --major-image-version
2630@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2631Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2632[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2633
2634@kindex --major-os-version
2635@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2636Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2637[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2638
2639@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2640@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2641Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2642[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2643
2644@kindex --minor-image-version
2645@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2646Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2647[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2648
2649@kindex --minor-os-version
2650@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2651Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2652[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2653
2654@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2655@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2656Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2657[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2658
2659@cindex DEF files, creating
2660@cindex DLLs, creating
2661@kindex --output-def
2662@item --output-def @var{file}
2663The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2664file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2665(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2666library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2667automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2668[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2669
b044cda1 2670@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2671@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2672@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2673@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2674Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2675@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2676By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2677for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2678execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2679[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2680
2681@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2682@item --disable-auto-image-base
2683Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2684user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2685default.
bb10df36 2686[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2687
2688@cindex DLLs, linking to
2689@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2690@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2691When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2692search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2693@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2694between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2695uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2696@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2697[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2698
2699@kindex --enable-auto-import
2700@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2701Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2702DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2703building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2704'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2705to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2706specification published by Microsoft.
2707
e2a83dd0
NC
2708Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2709data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2710placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2711around a problem with consts that is described here:
2712http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2713
4d8907ac
DS
2714Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2715see this message:
0d888aac 2716
ece2d90e 2717"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2718documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2719
ece2d90e
NC
2720This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2721ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2722allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2723fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2724constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2725multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2726this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2727of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2728the warning, and exit.
2729
2730There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2731data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2732
2fa9fc65
NC
2733One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2734of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2735this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2736
c0065db7
RM
2737A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2738that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2739there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2740a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2741
2742@example
2743extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2744extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2745 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2746@end example
2747
2748or
2749
2750@example
2751extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2752extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2753 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2754@end example
2755
c0065db7 2756For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2757is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2758
2759@example
2760extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2761extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2762 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2763@end example
2764
c406afaf
NC
2765or
2766
2767@example
2768extern long long extern_ll;
2769extern_ll -->
2770 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2771@end example
2772
2fa9fc65 2773A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2774'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2775@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2776requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2777building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2778merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2779between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2780constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2781
2782Original:
2783@example
2784--foo.h
2785extern int arr[];
2786--foo.c
2787#include "foo.h"
2788void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2789 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2790@}
2791@end example
2792
2793Solution 1:
2794@example
2795--foo.h
2796extern int arr[];
2797--foo.c
2798#include "foo.h"
2799void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2800 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2801 volatile int *parr = arr;
2802 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2803@}
2804@end example
2805
2806Solution 2:
2807@example
2808--foo.h
2809/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2810#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2811 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2812#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2813#else
2814#define FOO_IMPORT
2815#endif
2816extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2817--foo.c
2818#include "foo.h"
2819void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2820 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2821@}
2822@end example
2823
c0065db7 2824A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2825library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2826for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2827functions).
bb10df36 2828[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2829
2830@kindex --disable-auto-import
2831@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2832Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2833@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2834[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2835
2fa9fc65
NC
2836@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2837@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2838If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2839that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2840a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2841environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2842[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2843
2844@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2845@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2846Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2847DLLs.
bb10df36 2848[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2849
b044cda1
CW
2850@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2851@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2852Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2853[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2854
252b5132
RH
2855@kindex --section-alignment
2856@item --section-alignment
2857Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2858addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2859[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2860
2861@cindex stack size
2862@kindex --stack
2863@item --stack @var{reserve}
2864@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2865Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2866to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2867committed.
bb10df36 2868[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2869
2870@kindex --subsystem
2871@item --subsystem @var{which}
2872@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2873@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2874Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2875legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2876@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2877the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2878@var{which}.
bb10df36 2879[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2880
2f563b51
DK
2881The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2882of the PE file header:
2883[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2884
2d5c3743
NC
2885@kindex --high-entropy-va
2886@item --high-entropy-va
2887Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2888(ASLR).
2889
2f563b51
DK
2890@kindex --dynamicbase
2891@item --dynamicbase
2892The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2893randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2894Vista for i386 PE targets.
2895
2896@kindex --forceinteg
2897@item --forceinteg
2898Code integrity checks are enforced.
2899
2900@kindex --nxcompat
2901@item --nxcompat
2902The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2903This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2904
2905@kindex --no-isolation
2906@item --no-isolation
2907Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2908
2909@kindex --no-seh
2910@item --no-seh
2911The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2912this image.
2913
2914@kindex --no-bind
2915@item --no-bind
2916Do not bind this image.
2917
2918@kindex --wdmdriver
2919@item --wdmdriver
2920The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2921
2f563b51
DK
2922@kindex --tsaware
2923@item --tsaware
2924The image is Terminal Server aware.
2925
0cb112f7
CF
2926@kindex --insert-timestamp
2927@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2928@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2929Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2930as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2931other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2932will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2933same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2934can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2935that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2936identically.
252b5132
RH
2937@end table
2938
0285c67d
NC
2939@c man end
2940
ac145307
BS
2941@ifset C6X
2942@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2943
2944@c man begin OPTIONS
2945
2946The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2947libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2948all executables use an index of 0.
2949
2950@table @gcctabopt
2951
2952@kindex --dsbt-size
2953@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2954This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2955or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2956entries.
2957
2958@kindex --dsbt-index
2959@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2960This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2961to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2962executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2963@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2964
fbd9ad90
PB
2965@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2966The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2967exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2968
ac145307
BS
2969@end table
2970
2971@c man end
2972@end ifset
2973
93fd0973
SC
2974@ifset M68HC11
2975@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2976
2977@c man begin OPTIONS
2978
2979The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2980memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2981
2982@table @gcctabopt
2983
2984@kindex --no-trampoline
2985@item --no-trampoline
2986This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2987is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2988instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2989
2990@kindex --bank-window
2991@item --bank-window @var{name}
2992This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2993the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2994The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2995paging and addresses within the memory window.
2996
2997@end table
2998
2999@c man end
3000@end ifset
3001
7fb9f789
NC
3002@ifset M68K
3003@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3004
3005@c man begin OPTIONS
3006
3007The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3008when linking for 68K targets.
3009
3010@table @gcctabopt
3011
3012@kindex --got
3013@item --got=@var{type}
3014This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3015@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3016@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3017Info entry for @file{ld}.
3018
3019@end table
3020
3021@c man end
3022@end ifset
3023
833794fc
MR
3024@ifset MIPS
3025@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3026
3027@c man begin OPTIONS
3028
3029The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3030generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3031linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3032
3033@table @gcctabopt
3034
3035@kindex --insn32
3036@item --insn32
3037@kindex --no-insn32
3038@itemx --no-insn32
3039These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3040generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3041or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
304232-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3043used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3044possible.
3045
8b10b0b3
MR
3046@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3047@item --ignore-branch-isa
3048@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3049@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3050These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3051transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3052accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3053is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3054instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3055equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3056calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3057a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3058an error.
3059
833794fc
MR
3060@end table
3061
3062@c man end
3063@end ifset
3064
252b5132
RH
3065@ifset UsesEnvVars
3066@node Environment
3067@section Environment Variables
3068
0285c67d
NC
3069@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3070
560e09e9 3071You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3072@ifclear SingleFormat
3073@code{GNUTARGET},
3074@end ifclear
3075@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3076
36f63dca 3077@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3078@kindex GNUTARGET
3079@cindex default input format
3080@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3081use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3082of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3083@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3084of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3085attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3086this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3087there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3088object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3089BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3090in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3091@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3092
3093@kindex LDEMULATION
3094@cindex default emulation
3095@cindex emulation, default
3096@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3097@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3098behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3099available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3100the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3101variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3102linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3103
3104@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3105@cindex demangling, default
3106Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3107@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3108default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3109a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3110may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3111options.
3112
0285c67d
NC
3113@c man end
3114@end ifset
3115
252b5132
RH
3116@node Scripts
3117@chapter Linker Scripts
3118
3119@cindex scripts
3120@cindex linker scripts
3121@cindex command files
3122Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3123written in the linker command language.
3124
3125The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3126the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3127the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3128more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3129direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3130described below.
3131
3132The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3133yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3134linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3135to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3136such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3137
3138You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3139line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3140default linker script.
3141
3142You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3143to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3144Linker Scripts}.
3145
3146@menu
3147* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3148* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3149* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3150* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3151* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3152* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3153* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3154* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3155* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3156* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3157* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3158@end menu
3159
3160@node Basic Script Concepts
3161@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3162@cindex linker script concepts
3163We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3164describe the linker script language.
3165
3166The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3167file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3168@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3169The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3170purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3171among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3172section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3173in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3174
3175Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3176also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3177contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3178the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3179A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3180area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3181loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3182which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3183of debugging information.
3184
3185Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3186first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3187the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3188@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3189section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3190same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3191is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3192(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3193based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3194RAM address would be the VMA.
3195
3196You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3197program with the @samp{-h} option.
3198
3199Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3200@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3201has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3202information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3203will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3204static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3205referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3206
3207You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3208program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3209option.
3210
3211@node Script Format
3212@section Linker Script Format
3213@cindex linker script format
3214Linker scripts are text files.
3215
3216You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3217either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3218symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3219generally ignored.
3220
3221Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3222If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3223otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3224double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3225file name.
3226
3227You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3228@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3229to whitespace.
3230
3231@node Simple Example
3232@section Simple Linker Script Example
3233@cindex linker script example
3234@cindex example of linker script
3235Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3236
3237The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3238@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3239memory layout of the output file.
3240
3241The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3242describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3243code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3244@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3245Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3246your input files.
3247
3248For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
32490x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3250linker script which will do that:
3251@smallexample
3252SECTIONS
3253@{
3254 . = 0x10000;
3255 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3256 . = 0x8000000;
3257 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3258 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3259@}
3260@end smallexample
3261
3262You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3263followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3264descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3265
252b5132
RH
3266The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3267sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3268counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3269other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3270current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3271incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3272@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3273
3274The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3275required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3276after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3277which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3278wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3279means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3280
3281Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3282@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3283@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3284
3285The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3286the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3287at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3288output section, the value of the location counter will be
3289@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3290effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3291immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3292
3293The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3294alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3295example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3296sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3297may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3298sections.
3299
3300That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3301
3302@node Simple Commands
3303@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3304@cindex linker script simple commands
3305In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3306
3307@menu
3308* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3309* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3310@ifclear SingleFormat
3311* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3312@end ifclear
3313
4a93e180 3314* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3315* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3316@end menu
3317
3318@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3319@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3320@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3321@cindex start of execution
3322@cindex first instruction
3323@cindex entry point
3324The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3325point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3326entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3327@smallexample
3328ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3329@end smallexample
3330
3331There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3332entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3333stopping when one of them succeeds:
3334@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3335@item
252b5132 3336the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3337@item
252b5132 3338the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3339@item
3ab904c4
NC
3340the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3341targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3342check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3343@item
252b5132 3344the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3345@item
252b5132
RH
3346The address @code{0}.
3347@end itemize
3348
3349@node File Commands
36f63dca 3350@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3351@cindex linker script file commands
3352Several linker script commands deal with files.
3353
3354@table @code
3355@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3356@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3357@cindex including a linker script
3358Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3359be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3360with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
336110 levels deep.
3362
4006703d
NS
3363You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3364@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3365
252b5132
RH
3366@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3367@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3368@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3369@cindex input files in linker scripts
3370@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3371@cindex linker script input object files
3372The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3373in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3374
3375For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3376a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3377then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3378
3379In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3380script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3381
e3f2db7f
AO
3382In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3383with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3384located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3385for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3386open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3387linker will search through the archive library search path.
3388The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3389as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3390description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3391
ff5dcc92 3392If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3393name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3394@samp{-l}.
3395
3396When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3397files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3398script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3399
3400@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3401@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3402@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3403@cindex grouping input files
3404The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3405files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3406new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3407in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3408
b717d30e
JJ
3409@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3410@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3411@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3412This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3413commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3414as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3415with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3416when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3417@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3418and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3419setting afterwards.
3420
252b5132
RH
3421@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3422@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3423@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3424The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3425@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3426@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3427Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3428precedence.
3429
3430You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3431output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3432
3433@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3434@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3435@cindex library search path in linker script
3436@cindex archive search path in linker script
3437@cindex search path in linker script
3438The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3439@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3440@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3441on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3442are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3443the command line option are searched first.
3444
3445@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3446@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3447@cindex first input file
3448The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3449that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3450though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3451when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3452first file.
3453@end table
3454
3455@ifclear SingleFormat
3456@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3457@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3458A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3459
3460@table @code
3461@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3462@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3463@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3464@cindex output file format in linker script
3465The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3466output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3467exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3468(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3469line option takes precedence.
3470
3471You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3472formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3473This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3474desired endianness.
3475
3476If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3477will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3478output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3479used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3480
3481For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3482command:
3483@smallexample
3484OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3485@end smallexample
3486This says that the default format for the output file is
3487@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3488option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3489format.
3490
3491@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3492@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3493@cindex input file format in linker script
3494The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3495files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3496This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3497(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3498is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3499command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3500@end table
3501@end ifclear
3502
4a93e180
NC
3503@node REGION_ALIAS
3504@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3505@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3506@cindex region alias
3507@cindex region names
3508
3509Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3510@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3511
3512@smallexample
3513REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3514@end smallexample
3515
3516The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3517memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3518to memory regions. An example follows.
3519
3520Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3521memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3522that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3523non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3524access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3525read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3526sections:
3527
3528@itemize @bullet
3529@item
3530@code{.text} program code;
3531@item
3532@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3533@item
3534@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3535@item
3536@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3537@end itemize
3538
3539The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3540part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3541output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3542systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3543@code{C}:
3544@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3545@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3546@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3547@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3548@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3549@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3550@end multitable
3551The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3552loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3553the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3554the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3555
3556The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3557includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3558memory layout:
3559@smallexample
3560INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3561
3562SECTIONS
3563 @{
3564 .text :
3565 @{
3566 *(.text)
3567 @} > REGION_TEXT
3568 .rodata :
3569 @{
3570 *(.rodata)
3571 rodata_end = .;
3572 @} > REGION_RODATA
3573 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3574 @{
3575 data_start = .;
3576 *(.data)
3577 @} > REGION_DATA
3578 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3579 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3580 .bss :
3581 @{
3582 *(.bss)
3583 @} > REGION_BSS
3584 @}
3585@end smallexample
3586
3587Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3588regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3589variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3590@table @code
3591@item A
3592Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3593@smallexample
3594MEMORY
3595 @{
3596 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3597 @}
3598
3599REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3600REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3601REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3602REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3603@end smallexample
3604@item B
3605Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3606into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3607@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3608@smallexample
3609MEMORY
3610 @{
3611 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3612 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3613 @}
3614
3615REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3616REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3617REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3618REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3619@end smallexample
3620@item C
3621Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3622@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3623initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3624system start into the @code{RAM}.
3625@smallexample
3626MEMORY
3627 @{
3628 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3629 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3630 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3631 @}
3632
3633REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3634REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3635REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3636REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3637@end smallexample
3638@end table
3639
3640It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3641@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3642necessary:
3643@smallexample
3644#include <string.h>
3645
3646extern char data_start [];
3647extern char data_size [];
3648extern char data_load_start [];
3649
3650void copy_data(void)
3651@{
3652 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3653 @{
3654 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3655 @}
3656@}
3657@end smallexample
3658
252b5132 3659@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3660@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3661There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3662
3663@table @code
3664@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3665@kindex ASSERT
3666@cindex assertion in linker script
3667Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3668with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3669
fd1c4238
NC
3670Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3671take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3672inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3673for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3674symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3675
3676@smallexample
3677 .stack :
3678 @{
3679 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3680 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3681 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3682 @}
3683@end smallexample
3684
3685will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3686PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3687can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3688
3689@smallexample
3690 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3691 .stack :
3692 @{
3693 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3694 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3695 @}
3696@end smallexample
3697
3698will work.
3699
252b5132
RH
3700@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3701@kindex EXTERN
3702@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3703Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3704symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3705modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3706each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3707command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3708
3709@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3710@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3711@cindex common allocation in linker script
3712This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3713to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3714output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3715
4818e05f
AM
3716@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3717@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3718@cindex common allocation in linker script
3719This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3720command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3721to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3722
53d25da6
AM
3723@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3724@kindex INSERT
3725@cindex insert user script into default script
3726This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3727augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3728inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3729@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3730default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3731sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3732linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3733insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3734linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3735default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3736of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3737to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3738is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3739
3740@smallexample
3741SECTIONS
3742@{
3743 OVERLAY :
3744 @{
3745 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3746 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3747 @}
3748@}
3749INSERT AFTER .text;
3750@end smallexample
3751
252b5132
RH
3752@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3753@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3754@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3755This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3756references among certain output sections.
3757
3758In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3759using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3760will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3761errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3762a function defined in the other section.
3763
3764The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3765@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3766an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3767@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3768names.
3769
cdf96953
MF
3770@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3771@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3772@cindex cross references
3773This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3774references to one section from a list of other sections.
3775
3776The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3777output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3778a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3779there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3780must never call back.
3781
3782The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3783The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3784If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3785the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3786status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3787names, not input section names.
3788
252b5132
RH
3789@ifclear SingleFormat
3790@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3791@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3792@cindex machine architecture
3793@cindex architecture
3794Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3795of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3796architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3797the @samp{-f} option.
3798@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3799
3800@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3801@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3802This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3803@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3804in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3805@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3806@end table
3807
3808@node Assignments
3809@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3810@cindex assignment in scripts
3811@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3812@cindex variables, defining
3813You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3814the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3815
3816@menu
3817* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3818* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3819* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3820* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3821* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3822@end menu
3823
3824@node Simple Assignments
3825@subsection Simple Assignments
3826
3827You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3828
3829@table @code
3830@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3831@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3832@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3833@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3834@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3835@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3836@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3837@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3838@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3839@end table
3840
3841The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3842@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3843defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3844
3845The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3846may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3847
3848The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3849
3850Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3851
3852You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3853statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3854section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3855
3856The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3857expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3858
3859Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3860assignments may be used:
3861
3862@smallexample
3863floating_point = 0;
3864SECTIONS
3865@{
3866 .text :
3867 @{
3868 *(.text)
3869 _etext = .;
3870 @}
156e34dd 3871 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3872 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3873@}
3874@end smallexample
3875@noindent
3876In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3877zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3878the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3879defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3880upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3881
eb8476a6
MR
3882@node HIDDEN
3883@subsection HIDDEN
3884@cindex HIDDEN
3885For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3886exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3887
3888Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3889@code{HIDDEN}:
3890
3891@smallexample
3892HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3893SECTIONS
3894@{
3895 .text :
3896 @{
3897 *(.text)
3898 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3899 @}
3900 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3901 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3902@}
3903@end smallexample
3904@noindent
3905In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3906
252b5132
RH
3907@node PROVIDE
3908@subsection PROVIDE
3909@cindex PROVIDE
3910In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3911only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3912the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3913@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3914@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3915@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3916@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3917@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3918
3919Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3920@smallexample
3921SECTIONS
3922@{
3923 .text :
3924 @{
3925 *(.text)
3926 _etext = .;
3927 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3928 @}
3929@}
3930@end smallexample
3931
3932In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3933underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3934the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3935underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3936If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3937linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3938
7af8e998
L
3939@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3940@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3941@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3942Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3943hidden and won't be exported.
3944
73ae6183
NC
3945@node Source Code Reference
3946@subsection Source Code Reference
3947
3948Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3949intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3950a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3951symbol that does not have a value.
3952
3953Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3954transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3955stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3956prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3957mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3958of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3959variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3960linker script variable might be referred to as:
3961
3962@smallexample
3963 extern int foo;
3964@end smallexample
3965
3966But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3967
3968@smallexample
3969 _foo = 1000;
3970@end smallexample
3971
3972In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3973transformation has taken place.
3974
3975When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3976things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3977in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3978second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3979table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3980contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3981value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3982
3983@smallexample
3984 int foo = 1000;
3985@end smallexample
3986
10bf6894 3987creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3988holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3989number 1000 is initially stored.
3990
3991When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3992first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3993memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3994So:
3995
3996@smallexample
3997 foo = 1;
3998@end smallexample
3999
4000looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4001associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4002address. Whereas:
4003
4004@smallexample
4005 int * a = & foo;
4006@end smallexample
4007
10bf6894 4008looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4009and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4010the variable @samp{a}.
4011
4012Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4013the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4014an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4015
4016@smallexample
4017 foo = 1000;
4018@end smallexample
4019
4020creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4021the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4022address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4023linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4024access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4025
4026Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4027you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4028use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4029section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4030linker script contains these declarations:
4031
4032@smallexample
4033@group
4034 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4035 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4036 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4037@end group
4038@end smallexample
4039
4040Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4041
4042@smallexample
4043@group
4044 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4045
73ae6183
NC
4046 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4047@end group
4048@end smallexample
4049
4050Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4051Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4052arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4053
4054@smallexample
4055@group
4056 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4057
4058 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4059@end group
4060@end smallexample
4061
4062Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4063operators.
73ae6183 4064
252b5132 4065@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4066@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4067@kindex SECTIONS
4068The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4069into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4070
4071The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4072@smallexample
4073SECTIONS
4074@{
4075 @var{sections-command}
4076 @var{sections-command}
4077 @dots{}
4078@}
4079@end smallexample
4080
4081Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4082
4083@itemize @bullet
4084@item
4085an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4086@item
4087a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4088@item
4089an output section description
4090@item
4091an overlay description
4092@end itemize
4093
4094The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4095@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4096those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4097understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4098the layout of the output file.
4099
4100Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4101below.
4102
4103If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4104linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4105section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4106input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4107example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4108in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4109
4110@menu
4111* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4112* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4113* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4114* Input Section:: Input section description
4115* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4116* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4117* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4118* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4119* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4120@end menu
4121
4122@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4123@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4124The full description of an output section looks like this:
4125@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4126@group
7e7d5768 4127@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4128 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4129 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4130 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4131 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4132 @{
4133 @var{output-section-command}
4134 @var{output-section-command}
4135 @dots{}
abc9061b 4136 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4137@end group
4138@end smallexample
4139
4140Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4141
4142The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4143name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4144The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4145the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4146The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4147
4148Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4149
4150@itemize @bullet
4151@item
4152a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4153@item
4154an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4155@item
4156data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4157@item
4158a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4159@end itemize
4160
4161@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4162@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4163@cindex name, section
4164@cindex section name
4165The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4166meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4167support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4168must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4169example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4170output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4171names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4172quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4173characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4174commas must be quoted.
4175
4176The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4177Discarding}.
4178
4179@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4180@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4181@cindex address, section
4182@cindex section address
4183The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4184address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4185is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4186
4187If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4188section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4189to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4190alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4191contained within the output section.
4192
4193The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4194
4195@itemize @bullet
4196@item
4197If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4198is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4199in that region.
4200
4201@item
4202If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4203regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4204section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4205be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4206
4207@item
4208If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4209the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4210counter.
4211@end itemize
4212
4213@noindent
4214For example:
4215
252b5132
RH
4216@smallexample
4217.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4218@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4219
252b5132
RH
4220@noindent
4221and
ea5cae92 4222
252b5132
RH
4223@smallexample
4224.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4225@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4226
252b5132
RH
4227@noindent
4228are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4229@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4230counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4231counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4232input sections.
252b5132
RH
4233
4234The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4235For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4236so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4237do something like this:
4238@smallexample
4239.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4240@end smallexample
4241@noindent
4242This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4243aligned upward to the specified value.
4244
4245Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4246location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4247sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4248
4249@node Input Section
36f63dca 4250@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4251@cindex input sections
4252@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4253The most common output section command is an input section description.
4254
4255The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4256You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4257in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4258map the input files into your memory layout.
4259
4260@menu
4261* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4262* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4263* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4264* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4265* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4266@end menu
4267
4268@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4269@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4270@cindex input section basics
4271An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4272by a list of section names in parentheses.
4273
4274The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4275describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4276
4277The most common input section description is to include all input
4278sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4279include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4280@smallexample
4281*(.text)
4282@end smallexample
4283@noindent
18625d54 4284Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4285@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4286of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4287match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4288example:
252b5132 4289@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4290EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4291@end smallexample
4292@noindent
4293will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4294and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4295placed inside the section list, for example:
4296@smallexample
b4346c09 4297*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4298@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4299@noindent
4300The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4301two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4302more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4303
4304There are two ways to include more than one section:
4305@smallexample
4306*(.text .rdata)
4307*(.text) *(.rdata)
4308@end smallexample
4309@noindent
4310The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4311@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4312first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4313they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4314@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4315@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4316
8f1732fc
AB
4317When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4318is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4319immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4320@smallexample
4321*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4322@end smallexample
4323@noindent
4324will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4325@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4326from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4327exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4328could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4329@smallexample
4330*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4331@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4332@noindent
4333Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4334before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4335all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4336@smallexample
4337EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4338@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4339
252b5132
RH
4340You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4341You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4342needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4343@smallexample
4344data.o(.data)
4345@end smallexample
4346
ae17ab41
CM
4347To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4348of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4349
4350Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4351
4352@smallexample
4353@group
4354SECTIONS @{
4355 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4356 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4357@}
4358@end group
4359@end smallexample
4360
4361In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4362input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4363@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4364@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4365whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4366
967928e9
AM
4367You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4368matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4369with no whitespace around the colon.
4370
4371@table @samp
4372@item archive:file
4373matches file within archive
4374@item archive:
4375matches the whole archive
4376@item :file
4377matches file but not one in an archive
4378@end table
4379
4380Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4381wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4382single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4383@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4384within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4385also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4386other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4387from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4388command.
4389
252b5132
RH
4390If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4391the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4392commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4393@smallexample
4394data.o
4395@end smallexample
4396
967928e9
AM
4397When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4398and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4399characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4400name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4401did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4402though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4403@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4404the archive search path.
4405
4406@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4407@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4408@cindex input section wildcards
4409@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4410@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4411@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4412In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4413name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4414
4415The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4416pattern for the file name.
4417
4418The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4419
4420@table @samp
4421@item *
4422matches any number of characters
4423@item ?
4424matches any single character
4425@item [@var{chars}]
4426matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4427character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4428@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4429@item \
4430quotes the following character
4431@end table
4432
4433When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4434will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4435Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4436exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4437@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4438a @samp{/} character.
4439
4440File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4441specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4442does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4443
4444If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4445appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4446will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4447sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4448@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4449@smallexample
4450.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4451.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4452@end smallexample
4453
bcaa7b3e 4454@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4455Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4456in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4457this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4458pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4459@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4460into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4461
bcaa7b3e
L
4462@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4463@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4464difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4465descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4466Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4467reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4468
02ecc8e9
L
4469@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4470@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4471difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4472ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4473encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4474
bcaa7b3e
L
4475@cindex SORT
4476@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4477
4478When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4479can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4480
4481@enumerate
4482@item
4483@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4484It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4485sections have the same name.
4486@item
4487@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4488It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4489sections have the same alignment.
4490@item
c0065db7 4491@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4492treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4493@item
4494@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4495is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4496@item
4497All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4498@end enumerate
4499
4500When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4501section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4502takes precedence over the command line option.
4503
4504If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4505command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4506treated as nested sorting command.
4507
4508@enumerate
4509@item
4510@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4511@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4512@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4513@item
4514@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4515@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4516@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4517@end enumerate
4518
4519If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4520command line option will be ignored.
4521
eda680f8
L
4522@cindex SORT_NONE
4523@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4524section sorting option.
4525
252b5132
RH
4526If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4527@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4528precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4529
4530This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4531files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4532sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4533The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4534with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4535linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4536@smallexample
4537@group
4538SECTIONS @{
4539 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4540 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4541 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4542 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4543@}
4544@end group
4545@end smallexample
4546
4547@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4548@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4549@cindex common symbol placement
4550@cindex uninitialized data placement
4551A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4552file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4553linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4554named @samp{COMMON}.
4555
4556You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4557other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4558particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4559input files are placed in another section.
4560
4561In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4562@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4563@smallexample
4564.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4565@end smallexample
4566
4567@cindex scommon section
4568@cindex small common symbols
4569Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4570example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4571symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4572different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4573the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4574symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4575to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4576locations.
4577
4578@cindex [COMMON]
4579You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4580notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4581@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4582
4583@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4584@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4585@cindex KEEP
4586@cindex garbage collection
4587When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4588it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4589This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4590with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4591@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4592
4593@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4594@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4595The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4596to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4597start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4598@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4599follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4600@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4601@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4602All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4603files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4604
4605@smallexample
4606@group
4607SECTIONS @{
4608 outputa 0x10000 :
4609 @{
4610 all.o
4611 foo.o (.input1)
4612 @}
36f63dca
NC
4613@end group
4614@group
252b5132
RH
4615 outputb :
4616 @{
4617 foo.o (.input2)
4618 foo1.o (.input1)
4619 @}
36f63dca
NC
4620@end group
4621@group
252b5132
RH
4622 outputc :
4623 @{
4624 *(.input1)
4625 *(.input2)
4626 @}
4627@}
4628@end group
a1ab1d2a 4629@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4630
4631@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4632@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4633@cindex data
4634@cindex section data
4635@cindex output section data
4636@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4637@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4638@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4639@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4640@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4641You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4642@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4643an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4644parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4645value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4646counter.
4647
4648The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4649store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4650bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4651stored.
4652
4653For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4654of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4655@smallexample
4656BYTE(1)
4657LONG(addr)
4658@end smallexample
4659
4660When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4661same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4662target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4663@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4664@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4665
4666If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4667which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4668When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4669true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4670endianness of the first input object file.
4671
36f63dca 4672Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4673between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4674@smallexample
4675SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4676@end smallexample
4677whereas this will work:
4678@smallexample
4679SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4680@end smallexample
4681
252b5132
RH
4682@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4683@cindex holes, filling
4684@cindex unspecified memory
4685You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4686current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4687otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4688gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4689with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4690necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4691point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4692than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4693different parts of an output section.
4694
4695This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4696value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4697@smallexample
563e308f 4698FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4699@end smallexample
4700
4701The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4702section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4703part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4704entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4705precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4706expression.
252b5132
RH
4707
4708@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4709@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4710There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4711commands.
4712
4713@table @code
4714@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4715@cindex input filename symbols
4716@cindex filename symbols
4717@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4718The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4719The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4720file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4721the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4722
4723This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4724normally used for any other object file format.
4725
4726@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4727@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4728@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4729@item CONSTRUCTORS
4730When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4731unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4732destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4733arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4734automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4735For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4736linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4737@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4738ignored for other object file formats.
4739
4740The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4741constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4742Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4743the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4744first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4745of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4746compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4747formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4748@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4749the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4750destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4751@code{exit}.
4752
4753For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4754arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4755addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4756and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4757linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4758runtime code expects to see.
4759
4760@smallexample
4761 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4762 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4763 *(.ctors)
4764 LONG(0)
4765 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4766 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4767 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4768 *(.dtors)
4769 LONG(0)
4770 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4771@end smallexample
4772
4773If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4774which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4775are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4776are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4777command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4778@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4779@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4780@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4781
4782Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4783and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4784need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4785scripts.
4786
4787@end table
4788
4789@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4790@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4791@cindex discarding sections
4792@cindex sections, discarding
4793@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4794The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4795This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4796may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4797@smallexample
49c13adb 4798.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4799@end smallexample
4800@noindent
4801will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4802@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4803sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4804space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4805too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4806space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4807@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4808@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4809This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4810
a0976ea4 4811The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4812on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4813symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4814the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4815section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4816
4817@cindex /DISCARD/
4818The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4819input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4820section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4821
4822@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4823@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4824@cindex output section attributes
4825We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4826like this:
0c71d759 4827
252b5132 4828@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4829@group
7e7d5768 4830@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4831 [AT(@var{lma})]
4832 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4833 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4834 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4835 @{
4836 @var{output-section-command}
4837 @var{output-section-command}
4838 @dots{}
562d3460 4839 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4840@end group
4841@end smallexample
0c71d759 4842
252b5132
RH
4843We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4844@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4845remaining section attributes.
4846
a1ab1d2a 4847@menu
252b5132
RH
4848* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4849* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4850* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4851* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4852* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4853* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4854* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4855* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4856@end menu
4857
4858@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4859@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4860Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4861parentheses. The following types are defined:
4862
4863@table @code
4864@item NOLOAD
4865The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4866loaded into memory when the program is run.
4867@item DSECT
4868@itemx COPY
4869@itemx INFO
4870@itemx OVERLAY
4871These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4872rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4873marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4874section when the program is run.
4875@end table
4876
4877@kindex NOLOAD
4878@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4879@cindex loading, preventing
4880The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4881the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4882the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4883@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4884need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4885@smallexample
4886@group
4887SECTIONS @{
4888 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4889 @dots{}
4890@}
4891@end group
4892@end smallexample
4893
4894@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4895@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4896@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4897@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4898@cindex load address
4899@cindex section load address
4900Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4901@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4902@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4903specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4904address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4905
ea5cae92
NC
4906The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4907specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4908takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4909load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4910region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4911
4912If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4913section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4914load address:
4915
4916@itemize @bullet
4917@item
4918If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4919the LMA address as well.
4920
4921@item
4922If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4923
4924@item
4925Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4926with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4927section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4928VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4929the last section in the located region.
4930
4931@item
4932If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4933that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4934
4935@item
4936If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4937section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4938@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4939
4940@cindex ROM initialized data
4941@cindex initialized data in ROM
4942This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4943example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4944called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4945@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4946even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4947uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4948defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4949counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4950
4951@smallexample
4952@group
4953SECTIONS
4954 @{
4955 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4956 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4957 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4958 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4959 .bss 0x3000 :
4960 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4961@}
4962@end group
4963@end smallexample
4964
4965The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4966this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4967the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4968how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4969script.
4970
4971@smallexample
4972@group
4973extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4974char *src = &_etext;
4975char *dst = &_data;
4976
ea5cae92
NC
4977/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4978while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4979 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4980
ea5cae92 4981/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4982for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4983 *dst = 0;
4984@end group
4985@end smallexample
4986
bbf115d3
L
4987@node Forced Output Alignment
4988@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4989@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4990@cindex forcing output section alignment
4991@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4992You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4993alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4994intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4995
7e7d5768
AM
4996@node Forced Input Alignment
4997@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4998@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4999@cindex forcing input section alignment
5000@cindex input section alignment
5001You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5002SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5003sections, whether larger or smaller.
5004
0c71d759
NC
5005@node Output Section Constraint
5006@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5007@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5008@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5009@cindex constraints on output sections
5010You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5011of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5012read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5013@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5014
252b5132 5015@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5016@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5017@kindex >@var{region}
5018@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5019@cindex memory regions and sections
5020You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5021using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5022
5023Here is a simple example:
5024@smallexample
5025@group
5026MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5027SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5028@end group
5029@end smallexample
5030
5031@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5032@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5033@kindex :@var{phdr}
5034@cindex section, assigning to program header
5035@cindex program headers and sections
5036You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5037using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5038one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5039assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5040@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5041linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5042
5043Here is a simple example:
5044@smallexample
5045@group
5046PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5047SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5048@end group
5049@end smallexample
5050
5051@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5052@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5053@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5054@cindex section fill pattern
5055@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5056You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5057@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5058(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5059within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5060alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5061necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5062of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5063an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5064fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5065other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5066pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5067expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5068
5069You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5070output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5071
5072Here is a simple example:
5073@smallexample
5074@group
563e308f 5075SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5076@end group
5077@end smallexample
5078
5079@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5080@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5081@kindex OVERLAY
5082@cindex overlays
5083An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5084are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5085the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5086copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5087required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5088can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5089than another.
5090
5091Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5092@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5093output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5094command is as follows:
5095@smallexample
5096@group
5097OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5098 @{
5099 @var{secname1}
5100 @{
5101 @var{output-section-command}
5102 @var{output-section-command}
5103 @dots{}
5104 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5105 @var{secname2}
5106 @{
5107 @var{output-section-command}
5108 @var{output-section-command}
5109 @dots{}
5110 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5111 @dots{}
abc9061b 5112 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5113@end group
5114@end smallexample
5115
5116Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5117section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5118section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5119those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5120except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5121sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5122
abc9061b
CC
5123The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5124the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5125
252b5132
RH
5126The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5127addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5128memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5129whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5130and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5131and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5132
56dd11f0
NC
5133If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5134references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5135the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5136sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5137@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5138
5139For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5140provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5141defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5142@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5143the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5144within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5145symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5146
5147At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5148the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5149
5150Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5151@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5152@smallexample
5153@group
5154 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5155 @{
5156 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5157 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5158 @}
5159@end group
5160@end smallexample
5161@noindent
5162This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5163address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5164@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5165following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5166@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5167@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5168
5169C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5170like the following.
5171
5172@smallexample
5173@group
5174 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5175 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5176 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5177@end group
5178@end smallexample
5179
5180Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5181everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5182example could have been written identically as follows.
5183
5184@smallexample
5185@group
5186 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5187 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5188 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5189 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5190 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5191 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5192 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5193@end group
5194@end smallexample
5195
5196@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5197@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5198@kindex MEMORY
5199@cindex memory regions
5200@cindex regions of memory
5201@cindex allocating memory
5202@cindex discontinuous memory
5203The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5204memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5205
5206The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5207memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5208may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5209can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5210set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5211regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5212around to fit into the available regions.
5213
127fcdff
AB
5214A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5215however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5216specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5217@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5218@smallexample
5219@group
a1ab1d2a 5220MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5221 @{
5222 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5223 @dots{}
5224 @}
5225@end group
5226@end smallexample
5227
5228The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5229region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5230Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5231with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5232must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5233add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5234command.
252b5132
RH
5235
5236@cindex memory region attributes
5237The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5238whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5239not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5240@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5241section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5242the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5243them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5244
5245The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5246@table @samp
5247@item R
5248Read-only section
5249@item W
5250Read/write section
5251@item X
5252Executable section
5253@item A
5254Allocatable section
5255@item I
5256Initialized section
5257@item L
5258Same as @samp{I}
5259@item !
c09e9a8c 5260Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5261@end table
5262
5263If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5264@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5265attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5266in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5267attributes.
5268
5269@kindex ORIGIN =
5270@kindex o =
5271@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5272The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5273the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5274cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5275abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5276@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5277
5278@kindex LENGTH =
5279@kindex len =
5280@kindex l =
5281The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5282region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5283be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5284@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5285
5286In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5287available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5288and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5289linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5290is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5291or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5292explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5293region.
5294
5295@smallexample
5296@group
a1ab1d2a 5297MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5298 @{
5299 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5300 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5301 @}
5302@end group
5303@end smallexample
5304
5305Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5306specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5307@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5308a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5309output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5310was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5311the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5312output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5313region, the linker will issue an error message.
5314
3ec57632 5315It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5316expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5317@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5318
5319@smallexample
5320@group
c0065db7 5321 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5322@end group
5323@end smallexample
5324
252b5132
RH
5325@node PHDRS
5326@section PHDRS Command
5327@kindex PHDRS
5328@cindex program headers
5329@cindex ELF program headers
5330@cindex program segments
5331@cindex segments, ELF
5332The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5333@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5334loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5335program with the @samp{-p} option.
5336
5337When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5338reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5339program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5340This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5341interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5342
5343The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5344in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5345precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5346the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5347not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5348
5349The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5350generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5351ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5352
5353This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5354@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5355
5356@smallexample
5357@group
5358PHDRS
5359@{
5360 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5361 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5362@}
5363@end group
5364@end smallexample
5365
5366The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5367of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5368header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5369with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5370must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5371is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5372
5373Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5374system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5375specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5376sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5377attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5378Section Phdr}.
5379
5380It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5381merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5382repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5383contain the section.
5384
5385If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5386then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5387not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5388convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5389placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5390default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5391segment at all.
5392
5393@kindex FILEHDR
5394@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5395You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5396the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5397The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5398file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5399include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5400segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5401these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5402
5403The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5404value of the keyword.
5405
5406@table @asis
5407@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5408Indicates an unused program header.
5409
5410@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5411Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5412the file.
5413
5414@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5415Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5416
5417@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5418Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5419found.
5420
5421@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5422Indicates a segment holding note information.
5423
5424@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5425A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5426ABI.
5427
5428@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5429Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5430
1a9ccd70
NC
5431@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5432Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5433
252b5132
RH
5434@item @var{expression}
5435An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5436be used for types not defined above.
5437@end table
5438
5439You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5440in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5441@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5442Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5443output section attribute.
5444
5445The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5446which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5447explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5448an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5449header.
5450
5451Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5452headers used on a native ELF system.
5453
5454@example
5455@group
5456PHDRS
5457@{
5458 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5459 interp PT_INTERP ;
5460 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5461 data PT_LOAD ;
5462 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5463@}
5464
5465SECTIONS
5466@{
5467 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5468 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5469 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5470 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5471 @dots{}
5472 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5473 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5474 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5475 @dots{}
5476@}
5477@end group
5478@end example
5479
5480@node VERSION
5481@section VERSION Command
5482@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5483@cindex symbol versions
5484@cindex version script
5485@cindex versions of symbols
5486The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5487only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5488symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5489a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5490shared library.
5491
5492You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5493you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5494also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5495
5496The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5497@smallexample
5498VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5499@end smallexample
5500
5501The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5502Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5503version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5504version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5505version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5506scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5507library.
5508
5509The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5510examples.
5511
5512@smallexample
5513VERS_1.1 @{
5514 global:
5515 foo1;
5516 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5517 old*;
5518 original*;
5519 new*;
252b5132
RH
5520@};
5521
5522VERS_1.2 @{
5523 foo2;
5524@} VERS_1.1;
5525
5526VERS_2.0 @{
5527 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5528 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5529 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5530 "f(int, double)";
5531 @};
252b5132
RH
5532@} VERS_1.2;
5533@end smallexample
5534
5535This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5536version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5537The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5538a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5539of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5540symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5541is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5542in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5543However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5544name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5545
5546Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5547depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5548to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5549
5550Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5551depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5552and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5553
5554When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5555specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5556unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5557unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5558somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5559wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5560wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5561set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5562ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5563
5564The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5565they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5566could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5567However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5568
0f6bf451 5569Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5570in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5571symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5572won't.
5573
5574@smallexample
7c9c73be 5575@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5576@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5577
252b5132
RH
5578When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5579symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5580requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5581shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5582loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5583linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5584application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5585way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5586all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5587search for each symbol reference.
5588
5589The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5590doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5591that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5592functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5593the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5594required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5595that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5596versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5597the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5598
5599There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5600first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5601source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5602script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5603maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5604@smallexample
5605__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5606@end smallexample
5607@noindent
5608in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5609be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5610The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5611@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5612takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5613
5614The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5615function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5616an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5617version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5618linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5619
5620To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5621source file. Here is an example:
5622
5623@smallexample
5624__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5625__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5626__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5627__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5628@end smallexample
5629
5630In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5631unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5632example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5633@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5634
5635When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5636some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5637this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5638@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5639declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5640you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5641
5642If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5643within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5644(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5645specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5646
cb840a31
L
5647You can also specify the language in the version script:
5648
5649@smallexample
5650VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5651@end smallexample
5652
c0065db7 5653The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5654The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5655demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5656patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5657@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5658
86043bbb
MM
5659Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5660described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5661or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5662the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5663whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5664cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5665might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5666should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5667expect when you upgrade.
5668
252b5132
RH
5669@node Expressions
5670@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5671@cindex expressions
5672@cindex arithmetic
5673The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5674that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5675expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5676host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5677
5678You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5679
5680The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5681expressions.
5682
5683@menu
5684* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5685* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5686* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5687* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5688* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5689* Operators:: Operators
5690* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5691* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5692* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5693@end menu
5694
5695@node Constants
5696@subsection Constants
5697@cindex integer notation
5698@cindex constants in linker scripts
5699All constants are integers.
5700
5701As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5702octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5703hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5704@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5705@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5706value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5707
5708@cindex scaled integers
5709@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5710@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5711@cindex suffixes for integers
5712@cindex integer suffixes
5713In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5714constant by
5715@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5716@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5717@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5718@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5719@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5720@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5721@tex
5722${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5723@end tex
5724@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5725respectively. For example, the following
5726all refer to the same quantity:
5727
252b5132 5728@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5729_fourk_1 = 4K;
5730_fourk_2 = 4096;
5731_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5732_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5733@end smallexample
5734
8a308ae8
NC
5735Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5736conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5737
0c71d759
NC
5738@node Symbolic Constants
5739@subsection Symbolic Constants
5740@cindex symbolic constants
5741@kindex CONSTANT
5742It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5743the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5744
5745@table @code
5746@item MAXPAGESIZE
5747@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5748The target's maximum page size.
5749
5750@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5751@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5752The target's default page size.
5753@end table
5754
5755So for example:
5756
5757@smallexample
9d5777a3 5758 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5759@end smallexample
5760
5761will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5762supported by the target.
5763
252b5132
RH
5764@node Symbols
5765@subsection Symbol Names
5766@cindex symbol names
5767@cindex names
5768@cindex quoted symbol names
5769@kindex "
5770Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5771and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5772Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5773specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5774keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5775@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5776"SECTION" = 9;
5777"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5778@end smallexample
5779
5780Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5781to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5782whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5783
ecca9871
L
5784@node Orphan Sections
5785@subsection Orphan Sections
5786@cindex orphan
5787Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5788are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5789script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5790output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5791in which to place the orphaned input section.
5792
5793If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5794an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5795placed at the end of that output section.
5796
5797If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5798sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5799name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5800orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5801one new output section.
5802
5803If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5804then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5805in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5806linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5807attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5808sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5809support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5810
c005eb9e
AB
5811The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5812(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5813output sections an orphan is placed in.
5814
41911f68 5815If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5816the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5817__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5818section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5819orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5820representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5821character.
5822
252b5132
RH
5823@node Location Counter
5824@subsection The Location Counter
5825@kindex .
5826@cindex dot
5827@cindex location counter
5828@cindex current output location
5829The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5830current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5831location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5832within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5833anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5834
5835@cindex holes
5836Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5837moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5838location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5839and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5840doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5841
5842@smallexample
5843SECTIONS
5844@{
5845 output :
5846 @{
5847 file1(.text)
5848 . = . + 1000;
5849 file2(.text)
5850 . += 1000;
5851 file3(.text)
563e308f 5852 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5853@}
5854@end smallexample
5855@noindent
5856In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5857located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5858followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5859@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5860@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5861specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5862
5c6bbab8
NC
5863@cindex dot inside sections
5864Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5865current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5866statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5867absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5868however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5869not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5870
5871@smallexample
5872SECTIONS
5873@{
5874 . = 0x100
5875 .text: @{
5876 *(.text)
5877 . = 0x200
5878 @}
5879 . = 0x500
5880 .data: @{
5881 *(.data)
5882 . += 0x600
5883 @}
5884@}
5885@end smallexample
5886
5887The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5888and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5889the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5890much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5891move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5892and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5893the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5894the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5895
b5666f2f
AM
5896@cindex dot outside sections
5897Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5898output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5899needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5900
5901@smallexample
5902SECTIONS
5903@{
5904 start_of_text = . ;
5905 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5906 end_of_text = . ;
5907
5908 start_of_data = . ;
5909 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5910 end_of_data = . ;
5911@}
5912@end smallexample
5913
5914If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5915not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5916between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5917should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5918blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5919the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5920sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5921statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5922special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5923place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5924as follows:
5925
5926@smallexample
5927SECTIONS
5928@{
5929 start_of_text = . ;
5930 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5931 end_of_text = . ;
5932
5933 start_of_data = . ;
5934 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5935 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5936 end_of_data = . ;
5937@}
5938@end smallexample
5939
5940This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5941@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5942placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5943assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5944a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5945section. So you could write:
5946
5947@smallexample
5948SECTIONS
5949@{
5950 start_of_text = . ;
5951 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5952 end_of_text = . ;
5953
5954 . = . ;
5955 start_of_data = . ;
5956 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5957 end_of_data = . ;
5958@}
5959@end smallexample
5960
5961Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5962@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5963
252b5132
RH
5964@need 2000
5965@node Operators
5966@subsection Operators
5967@cindex operators for arithmetic
5968@cindex arithmetic operators
5969@cindex precedence in expressions
5970The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5971the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5972@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5973@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5974@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5975@smallexample
5976precedence associativity Operators Notes
5977(highest)
59781 left ! - ~ (1)
59792 left * / %
59803 left + -
59814 left >> <<
59825 left == != > < <= >=
59836 left &
59847 left |
59858 left &&
59869 left ||
598710 right ? :
598811 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5989(lowest)
5990@end smallexample
5991Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5992(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5993(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5994@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5995@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5996@tex
5997\vskip \baselineskip
5998%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5999\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6000\hrule
6001\halign
6002{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6003height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6004&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6005height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6006\noalign{\hrule}
6007height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6008&highest&&&&&\cr
6009% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6010&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6011&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6012&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6013&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6014&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6015&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6016&7&&left&&|&\cr
6017&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6018&9&&left&&||&\cr
6019&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6020&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6021&lowest&&&&&\cr
6022height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6023\hrule}
6024@end tex
6025@iftex
6026{
6027@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6028@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6029@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6030}
6031@end iftex
6032@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6033
6034@node Evaluation
6035@subsection Evaluation
6036@cindex lazy evaluation
6037@cindex expression evaluation order
6038The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6039an expression when absolutely necessary.
6040
6041The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6042address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6043regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6044as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6045
6046However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6047until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6048other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6049for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6050
6051The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6052assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6053allocation.
6054
6055Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6056@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6057
6058If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6059available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6060following
6061@smallexample
6062@group
6063SECTIONS
6064 @{
a1ab1d2a 6065 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6066 @{ *(.text) @}
6067 @}
6068@end group
6069@end smallexample
6070@noindent
6071will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6072address}.
6073
6074@node Expression Section
6075@subsection The Section of an Expression
6076@cindex expression sections
6077@cindex absolute expressions
6078@cindex relative expressions
6079@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6080@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6081@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6082Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6083relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6084using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6085value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6086symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6087operations.
6088
abf4be64
AM
6089Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6090section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6091address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6092@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6093functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6094One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6095(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6096differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6097versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6098section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6099Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6100absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6101given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6102everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6103
6104In the following simple example,
252b5132 6105
7542af2a
AM
6106@smallexample
6107@group
6108SECTIONS
6109 @{
6110 . = 0x100;
6111 __executable_start = 0x100;
6112 .data :
6113 @{
6114 . = 0x10;
6115 __data_start = 0x10;
6116 *(.data)
6117 @}
6118 @dots{}
6119 @}
6120@end group
6121@end smallexample
252b5132 6122
7542af2a
AM
6123both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6124address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6125@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6126section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6127
5c3049d2
AM
6128For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6129addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6130
6131@itemize @bullet
6132@item
c05f749e
AM
6133Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6134operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6135absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6136@item
7542af2a
AM
6137Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6138relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6139and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6140@item
c05f749e
AM
6141Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6142in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6143address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6144before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6145@end itemize
6146
6147The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6148
6149@itemize @bullet
6150@item
6151An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6152@item
6153The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6154@item
9bc8bb33 6155The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6156relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6157(after above conversions) is also a number when
6158@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6159but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6160@item
6161The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6162relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6163section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6164@item
6165The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6166conversions) is an absolute address.
6167@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6168
6169You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6170to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6171create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6172section @samp{.data}:
6173@smallexample
6174SECTIONS
6175 @{
6176 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6177 @}
6178@end smallexample
6179@noindent
6180If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6181@samp{.data} section.
6182
7542af2a
AM
6183Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6184particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6185
252b5132
RH
6186@node Builtin Functions
6187@subsection Builtin Functions
6188@cindex functions in expressions
6189The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6190use in linker script expressions.
6191
6192@table @code
6193@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6194@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6195@cindex expression, absolute
6196Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6197of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6198value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6199normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6200
6201@item ADDR(@var{section})
6202@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6203@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6204Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6205script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6206the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6207@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6208@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6209the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6210@smallexample
6211@group
6212SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6213 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6214 @{
252b5132
RH
6215 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6216 @dots{}
6217 @}
6218 .output :
6219 @{
6220 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6221 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6222 @}
6223@dots{} @}
6224@end group
6225@end smallexample
6226
876f4090
NS
6227@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6228@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6229@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6230@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6231@cindex round up location counter
6232@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6233@cindex round up expression
6234@cindex align expression
6235Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6236to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6237doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6238arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6239expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6240equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6241
6242Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6243next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6244variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6245input sections:
252b5132
RH
6246@smallexample
6247@group
6248SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6249 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6250 *(.data)
6251 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6252 @}
6253@dots{} @}
6254@end group
6255@end smallexample
6256@noindent
6257The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6258a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6259a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6260of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6261
6262The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6263
362c1d1a
NS
6264@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6265@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6266@cindex section alignment
6267Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6268been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6269evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6270the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6271value in that section.
6272@smallexample
6273@group
6274SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6275 .output @{
6276 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6277 @dots{}
6278 @}
6279@dots{} @}
6280@end group
6281@end smallexample
6282
252b5132
RH
6283@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6284@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6285This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6286scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6287section.
6288
2d20f7bf
JJ
6289@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6290@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6291This is equivalent to either
6292@smallexample
6293(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6294@end smallexample
6295or
6296@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6297(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6298 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6299@end smallexample
6300@noindent
6301depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6302for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6303@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6304If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6305memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6306bytes in the on-disk file.
6307
6308This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6309any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6310@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6311be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6312working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6313
6314@noindent
6315Example:
6316@smallexample
6317 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6318@end smallexample
6319
6320@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6321@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6322This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6323evaluation purposes.
6324
6325@smallexample
6326 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6327@end smallexample
6328
a4f5ad88
JJ
6329@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6330@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6331This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6332@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6333When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6334does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6335@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6336boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6337it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6338@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6339padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6340section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6341
6342@smallexample
6343 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6344@end smallexample
6345
252b5132
RH
6346@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6347@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6348@cindex symbol defaults
6349Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6350defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6351return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6352default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6353shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6354the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6355existed, its value is preserved:
6356
6357@smallexample
6358@group
6359SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6360 .text : @{
6361 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6362 @dots{}
6363 @}
6364 @dots{}
6365@}
6366@end group
6367@end smallexample
6368
3ec57632
NC
6369@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6370@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6371Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6372
252b5132
RH
6373@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6374@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6375@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6376Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6377Section LMA}).
6378
2e53f7d6
NC
6379@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6380@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6381Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6382@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6383
252b5132
RH
6384@kindex MAX
6385@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6386Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6387
6388@kindex MIN
6389@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6390Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6391
6392@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6393@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6394@cindex unallocated address, next
6395Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6396This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6397use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6398output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6399
3ec57632
NC
6400@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6401@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6402Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6403
ba916c8a
MM
6404@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6405@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6406Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6407value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6408@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6409will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6410can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6411``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6412name.
6413
252b5132
RH
6414@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6415@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6416@cindex section size
6417Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6418been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6419evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6420@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6421@smallexample
6422@group
6423SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6424 .output @{
6425 .start = . ;
6426 @dots{}
6427 .end = . ;
6428 @}
6429 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6430 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6431@dots{} @}
6432@end group
6433@end smallexample
6434
6435@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6436@itemx sizeof_headers
6437@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6438@cindex header size
6439Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6440information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6441this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6442choose, to facilitate paging.
6443
6444@cindex not enough room for program headers
6445@cindex program headers, not enough room
6446When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6447@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6448number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6449addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6450additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6451room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6452the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6453script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6454you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6455command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6456@end table
6457
6458@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6459@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6460@cindex implicit linker scripts
6461If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6462an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6463linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6464linker will report an error.
6465
6466An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6467
6468Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6469assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6470commands.
6471
6472Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6473at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6474read. This can affect archive searching.
6475
6476@ifset GENERIC
6477@node Machine Dependent
6478@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6479
6480@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6481@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6482sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6483functionality are not listed.
6484
6485@menu
36f63dca
NC
6486@ifset H8300
6487* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6488@end ifset
6489@ifset I960
6490* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6491@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6492@ifset M68HC11
6493* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6494@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6495@ifset ARM
6496* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6497@end ifset
6498@ifset HPPA
6499* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6500@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6501@ifset M68K
6502* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6503@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6504@ifset MIPS
6505* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6506@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6507@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6508* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6509@end ifset
2469cfa2 6510@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6511* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6512@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6513@ifset NDS32
6514* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6515@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6516@ifset NIOSII
6517* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6518@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6519@ifset POWERPC
6520* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6521@end ifset
6522@ifset POWERPC64
6523* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6524@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6525@ifset SPU
6526* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6527@end ifset
74459f0e 6528@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6529* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6530@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6531@ifset WIN32
6532* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6533@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6534@ifset XTENSA
6535* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6536@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6537@end menu
6538@end ifset
6539
252b5132
RH
6540@ifset H8300
6541@ifclear GENERIC
6542@raisesections
6543@end ifclear
6544
6545@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6546@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6547
6548@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6549For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6550you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6551
6552@table @emph
6553@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6554@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6555@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6556targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6557program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6558respectively.
6559
6560@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6561@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6562@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6563@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6564sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6565page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6566(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6567@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6568top page of memory).
1502569c 6569
81f5558e
NC
6570@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6571indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6572displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6573the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6574@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6575whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6576range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6577
1502569c 6578@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6579@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6580biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6581which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6582page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6583(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6584@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6585the top page of memory).
6586
6587@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6588@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
658932 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6590changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6591(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6592@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6593the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6594@end table
6595
6596@ifclear GENERIC
6597@lowersections
6598@end ifclear
6599@end ifset
6600
36f63dca 6601@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6602@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6603@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6604@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6605@node Renesas
6606@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6607
c2dcd04e
NC
6608@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6609H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6610options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6611@end ifset
6612@end ifclear
6613
6614@ifset I960
6615@ifclear GENERIC
6616@raisesections
6617@end ifclear
6618
6619@node i960
6620@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6621
6622@cindex i960 support
6623
6624You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6625specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6626family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6627incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6628linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6629libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6630search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6631
6632For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6633well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6634paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6635the names
6636
6637@smallexample
6638@group
6639try
6640libtry.a
6641tryca
6642libtryca.a
6643@end group
6644@end smallexample
6645
6646@noindent
6647The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6648two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6649
6650You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6651the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6652use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6653specifies a library.
6654
6655@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6656@cindex relaxing on i960
6657@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6658you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6659@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6660them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6661instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6662instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6663target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6664not itself call any subroutines).
6665
6666@ifclear GENERIC
6667@lowersections
6668@end ifclear
6669@end ifset
6670
6671@ifset ARM
6672@ifclear GENERIC
6673@raisesections
6674@end ifclear
6675
93fd0973
SC
6676@ifset M68HC11
6677@ifclear GENERIC
6678@raisesections
6679@end ifclear
6680
6681@node M68HC11/68HC12
6682@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6683
6684@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6685
6686@subsection Linker Relaxation
6687
6688For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6689optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6690
6691@table @emph
6692@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6693@item relaxing address modes
6694@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6695targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6696program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6697respectively.
6698
6699@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6700transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6701page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6702
6703@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6704When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6705of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6706addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6707@code{bset} instructions.
6708
6709@end table
6710
6711@subsection Trampoline Generation
6712
6713@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6714@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6715For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6716call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6717will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6718trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6719case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6720point to the function trampoline.
6721
6722@ifclear GENERIC
6723@lowersections
6724@end ifclear
6725@end ifset
6726
36f63dca 6727@node ARM
3674e28a 6728@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6729
6730@cindex ARM interworking support
6731@kindex --support-old-code
6732For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6733between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6734been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6735line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6736libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6737option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6738given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6739which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6740the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6741non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6742
6743@cindex thumb entry point
6744@cindex entry point, thumb
6745@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6746The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6747@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6748But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6749branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6750executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6751
ce11ba6c
KT
6752@cindex PE import table prefixing
6753@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6754The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6755the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6756element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6757import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6758
e489d0ae
PB
6759@cindex BE8
6760@kindex --be8
6761The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6762executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6763objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6764option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6765little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6766
3674e28a
PB
6767@cindex TARGET1
6768@kindex --target1-rel
6769@kindex --target1-abs
6770The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6771@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6772or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6773and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6774
6775@cindex TARGET2
6776@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6777The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6778@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6779meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6780@table @samp
6781@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6782@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6783@item abs
6784@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6785@item got-rel
6786@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6787@end table
6788
319850b4
JB
6789@cindex FIX_V4BX
6790@kindex --fix-v4bx
6791The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6792specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6793interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6794also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6795
6796In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6797linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6798@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6799
6800In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6801relocations are ignored.
6802
845b51d6
PB
6803@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6804@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6805Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6806relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6807
6808@smallexample
6809TST rM, #1
6810MOVEQ PC, rM
6811BX Rn
6812@end smallexample
6813
6814This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6815and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6816condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6817
33bfe774
JB
6818@cindex USE_BLX
6819@kindex --use-blx
6820The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6821BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6822situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6823code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6824each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6825
6826This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6827specify it if you are using that target.
6828
c6dd86c6
JB
6829@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6830@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6831The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6832bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6833instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6834to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6835the support code can read the intended values.
6836
6837The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6838intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6839and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6840intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6841full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6842you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6843
6844If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6845enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6846@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6847mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6848vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6849@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6850
6851If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6852potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6853such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6854first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6855instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6856the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6857are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6858
2de70689
MGD
6859@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6860@kindex --fix-arm1176
6861@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6862The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6863in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6864are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6865unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6866
9d5777a3 6867Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6868Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6869http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6870
a504d23a
LA
6871@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6872@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6873
6874The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6875workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6876the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6877off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6878the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6879core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6880integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6881VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6882
6883The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6884necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6885
6886The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6887@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6888STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6889linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6890@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6891
6892If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6893potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6894such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6895replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6896branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6897then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6898
6899The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6900the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6901
6902The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6903they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6904there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6905occurs.
6906
6907The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6908PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6909large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6910cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6911occurs.
6912
bf21ed78
MS
6913@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6914@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6915The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6916warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6917enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6918linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6919using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6920not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6921
6922@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6923@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6924The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6925warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6926@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6927linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6928using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6929
726150b7
NC
6930@cindex PIC_VENEER
6931@kindex --pic-veneer
6932The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6933ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6934is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6935@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6936
6937@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6938@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6939The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6940code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6941perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6942placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6943controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6944The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6945duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6946group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6947code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6948where they should be placed.
6949
6950The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6951@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6952placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6953branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6954placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6955value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6956exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6957A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6958linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6959from the input sections.
6960
6961The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6962@samp{N = +1}.
6963
1a51c1a4
NC
6964Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6965only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6966otherwise.
6967
1db37fe6
YG
6968@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6969@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6970@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6971The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6972
6973The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6974
68fcca92
JW
6975@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6976@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6977@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6978The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6979
6980Please contact ARM for further details.
6981
1db37fe6
YG
6982@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6983@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6984@cindex Merging exidx entries
6985The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6986
6987@kindex --long-plt
6988@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6989The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6990which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6991entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6992
1f56df9d
JW
6993@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
6994@cindex AArch64 rela addend
6995The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
6996link-time values for dynamic relocations.
6997
4ba2ef8f
TP
6998@cindex Placement of SG veneers
6999All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7000Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
7001@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7002veneers in memory.
7003
54ddd295
TP
7004@kindex --cmse-implib
7005@cindex Secure gateway import library
7006The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7007specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7008secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7009executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7010
0955507f
TP
7011@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7012@cindex Input import library
7013The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7014must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7015given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7016in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7017@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7018library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7019library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7020for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7021specified.
7022
36f63dca
NC
7023@ifclear GENERIC
7024@lowersections
7025@end ifclear
7026@end ifset
7027
7028@ifset HPPA
7029@ifclear GENERIC
7030@raisesections
7031@end ifclear
7032
7033@node HPPA ELF32
7034@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7035@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7036@kindex --multi-subspace
7037When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7038import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7039The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7040stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7041multiple sub-spaces.
7042
7043@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7044@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7045Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7046stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7047@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7048sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7049a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7050the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7051conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7052prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7053A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7054branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7055@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7056@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7057detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7058positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7059
7060Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7061single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7062create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7063large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7064
7065@ifclear GENERIC
7066@lowersections
7067@end ifclear
7068@end ifset
7069
7fb9f789
NC
7070@ifset M68K
7071@ifclear GENERIC
7072@raisesections
7073@end ifclear
7074
7075@node M68K
7076@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7077
7078@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7079@kindex --got=@var{type}
7080The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7081The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7082@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7083the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7084@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7085entries only at non-negative offsets.
7086@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7087entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7088support such GOTs.
7089@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7090output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7091file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7092files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7093
7094@ifclear GENERIC
7095@lowersections
7096@end ifclear
7097@end ifset
7098
833794fc
MR
7099@ifset MIPS
7100@ifclear GENERIC
7101@raisesections
7102@end ifclear
7103
7104@node MIPS
7105@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7106
7107@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7108@kindex --insn32
7109@kindex --no-insn32
7110The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7111microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7112in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7113used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7114or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7115including 16-bit ones where possible.
7116
8b10b0b3
MR
7117@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7118@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7119@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7120The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7121control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7122@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7123relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7124calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7125relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7126instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7127or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7128the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7129
833794fc
MR
7130@ifclear GENERIC
7131@lowersections
7132@end ifclear
7133@end ifset
7134
36f63dca
NC
7135@ifset MMIX
7136@ifclear GENERIC
7137@raisesections
7138@end ifclear
7139
7140@node MMIX
7141@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7142For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7143@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7144understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7145can translate between the two formats.
7146
7147There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7148Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7149registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7150equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7151@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7152global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7153this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7154symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7155
7a2de473
HPN
7156Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7157@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7158The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7159of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7160
7161Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7162are left out from an mmo file.
7163
7164@ifclear GENERIC
7165@lowersections
7166@end ifclear
7167@end ifset
7168
7169@ifset MSP430
7170@ifclear GENERIC
7171@raisesections
7172@end ifclear
7173
7174@node MSP430
7175@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7176For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7177will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7178just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7179
7180@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7181The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7182
7183@table @code
7184@item @samp{.vectors}
7185Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7186
7187@item @samp{.bootloader}
7188Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7189in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7190
7191@item @samp{.infomem}
7192Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7193this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7194
c0065db7 7195@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7196This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7197in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7198
7199@item @samp{.noinit}
7200Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7201
c0065db7 7202The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7203@end table
7204
7205@ifclear GENERIC
7206@lowersections
7207@end ifclear
7208@end ifset
7209
35c08157
KLC
7210@ifset NDS32
7211@ifclear GENERIC
7212@raisesections
7213@end ifclear
7214
7215@node NDS32
7216@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7217@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7218For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7219relaxes objects according to these options.
7220
7221@table @code
7222@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7223Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7224
7225@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7226Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7227
7228@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7229Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7230
7231@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7232Export the EX9 table after linking.
7233
7234@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7235Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7236
7237@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7238Update the existing EX9 table.
7239
7240@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7241Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7242
7243@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7244Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7245
7246@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7247Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7248
7249@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7250Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7251@end table
7252
7253@ifclear GENERIC
7254@lowersections
7255@end ifclear
7256@end ifset
7257
78058a5e
SL
7258@ifset NIOSII
7259@ifclear GENERIC
7260@raisesections
7261@end ifclear
7262
7263@node Nios II
7264@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7265@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7266@kindex --relax on Nios II
7267
7268Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7269transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7270which may result in @command{ld} giving
7271@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7272The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7273trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7274outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7275trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7276be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7277larger than 256MB.
7278
7279The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7280is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7281@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7282locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7283source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7284register as a temporary.
7285
7286Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7287relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7288option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7289
7290@ifclear GENERIC
7291@lowersections
7292@end ifclear
7293@end ifset
7294
2a60a7a8
AM
7295@ifset POWERPC
7296@ifclear GENERIC
7297@raisesections
7298@end ifclear
7299
7300@node PowerPC ELF32
7301@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7302@cindex PowerPC long branches
7303@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7304Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7305displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7306@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7307@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7308the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7309section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7310section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7311@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7312both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7313considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7314
7315@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7316@table @option
7317@cindex PowerPC PLT
7318@kindex --bss-plt
7319@item --bss-plt
7320Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7321generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7322the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7323writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7324@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7325PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7326compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7327BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7328
016687f8
AM
7329@kindex --secure-plt
7330@item --secure-plt
7331@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7332@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7333when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7334layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7335style BSS PLT.
7336
2a60a7a8
AM
7337@cindex PowerPC GOT
7338@kindex --sdata-got
7339@item --sdata-got
7340The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7341sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7342@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7343section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7344@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7345@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7346@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7347@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7348PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7349pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7350GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7351really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7352
7353@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7354@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7355@item --emit-stub-syms
7356This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7357symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7358
7359@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7360@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7361@item --no-tls-optimize
7362PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7363sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7364disable the optimization.
7365@end table
7366
7367@ifclear GENERIC
7368@lowersections
7369@end ifclear
7370@end ifset
7371
7372@ifset POWERPC64
7373@ifclear GENERIC
7374@raisesections
7375@end ifclear
7376
7377@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7378@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7379
7380@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7381@table @option
7382@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7383@kindex --stub-group-size
7384@item --stub-group-size
7385Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7386by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7387@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7388sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7389a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7390the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7391conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7392prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7393A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7394branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7395@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7396@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7397detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7398positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7399
7400Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7401single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7402create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7403large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7404
7405@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7406@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7407@item --emit-stub-syms
7408This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7409symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7410
7411@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7412@kindex --dotsyms
7413@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7414@item --dotsyms
7415@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7416These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7417in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7418function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7419code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7420properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7421to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7422@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7423dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7424feature.
7425
7ae4ea7d
AM
7426@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7427@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7428@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7429@item --save-restore-funcs
7430@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7431These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7432provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7433@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7434function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7435link.
7436
2a60a7a8
AM
7437@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7438@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7439@item --no-tls-optimize
7440PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7441sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7442disable the optimization.
7443
7c9cf415
AM
7444@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7445@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7446@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7447@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7448@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7449These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7450stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7451an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7452@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7453stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7454option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7455Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7456slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7457application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7458normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7459
2a60a7a8
AM
7460@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7461@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7462@item --no-opd-optimize
7463PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7464corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7465the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7466Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7467
7468@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7469@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7470@item --non-overlapping-opd
7471Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7472@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7473the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7474entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7475
7476@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7477@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7478@item --no-toc-optimize
7479PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7480entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7481reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7482marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7483marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7484relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7485unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7486reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7487discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7488reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7489code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7490optimization.
7491
7492@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7493@kindex --no-multi-toc
7494@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7495If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7496@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7497where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7498entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7499total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7500grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7501TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7502calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7503help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
750464K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7505Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7506
7507@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7508@kindex --no-toc-sort
7509@item --no-toc-sort
7510By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7511happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7512placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7513with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7514referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7515@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7516results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7517off this feature.
7518
7519@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7520@kindex --plt-align
7521@kindex --no-plt-align
7522@item --plt-align
7523@itemx --no-plt-align
7524Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7525padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7526specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7527that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7528stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7529
7530@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7531@kindex --plt-static-chain
7532@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7533@item --plt-static-chain
7534@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7535Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7536chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7537chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7538
7539@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7540@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7541@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7542@item --plt-thread-safe
7543@itemx --no-thread-safe
7544With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7545lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7546another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7547order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7548memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7549barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7550looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7551seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7552default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7553@end table
7554
7555@ifclear GENERIC
7556@lowersections
7557@end ifclear
7558@end ifset
7559
49fa1e15
AM
7560@ifset SPU
7561@ifclear GENERIC
7562@raisesections
7563@end ifclear
7564
7565@node SPU ELF
7566@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7567
7568@cindex SPU ELF options
7569@table @option
7570
7571@cindex SPU plugins
7572@kindex --plugin
7573@item --plugin
7574This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7575
7576@cindex SPU overlays
7577@kindex --no-overlays
7578@item --no-overlays
7579Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7580regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7581@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7582turns off all this special overlay handling.
7583
7584@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7585@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7586@item --emit-stub-syms
7587This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7588symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7589
7590@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7591@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7592@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7593This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7594function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7595on calls to non-overlay regions.
7596
7597@cindex SPU local store size
7598@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7599@item --local-store=lo:hi
7600@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7601the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7602range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7603
c0065db7 7604@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7605@kindex --stack-analysis
7606@item --stack-analysis
7607SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7608unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7609under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7610@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7611@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7612determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7613for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7614for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7615for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7616find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7617and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7618under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7619dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7620is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7621and calls will be given.
7622
c0065db7 7623@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7624@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7625@item --emit-stack-syms
7626This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7627in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7628These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7629functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7630functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7631such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7632The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7633@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7634@end table
7635
7636@ifclear GENERIC
7637@lowersections
7638@end ifclear
7639@end ifset
7640
36f63dca
NC
7641@ifset TICOFF
7642@ifclear GENERIC
7643@raisesections
7644@end ifclear
7645
7646@node TI COFF
7647@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7648@cindex TI COFF versions
7649@kindex --format=@var{version}
7650The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7651TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7652also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7653format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7654header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7655
7656@ifclear GENERIC
7657@lowersections
7658@end ifclear
7659@end ifset
7660
2ca22b03
NC
7661@ifset WIN32
7662@ifclear GENERIC
7663@raisesections
7664@end ifclear
7665
7666@node WIN32
7667@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7668
c0065db7 7669This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7670See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7671command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7672
7673@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7674@cindex import libraries
7675@item import libraries
69da35b5 7676The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7677libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7678regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7679archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7680support for creating such libraries provided with the
7681@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7682
c0065db7
RM
7683@item exporting DLL symbols
7684@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7685The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7686
7687@table @emph
7688@item using auto-export functionality
7689@cindex using auto-export functionality
7690By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7691which is controlled by the following command line options:
7692
0a5d968e
NC
7693@itemize
7694@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7695@item --exclude-symbols
7696@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7697@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7698@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7699@end itemize
7700
09e2aba4
DK
7701When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7702(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7703symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7704often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7705private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7706options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7707exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7708final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7709
7710If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7711command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7712if either of the following are true:
7713
7714@itemize
7715@item A DEF file is used.
7716@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7717@end itemize
dc8465bf 7718
c0065db7
RM
7719@item using a DEF file
7720@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7721Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7722an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7723exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7724name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7725command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7726
7727@example
7728gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7729@end example
7730
0a5d968e
NC
7731Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7732@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7733
dc8465bf
NC
7734Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7735
7736@example
4b5bd4e7 7737LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7738
7739EXPORTS
7740foo
7741bar
7742_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7743another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7744var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7745doo = foo == foo2
7746eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7747@end example
dc8465bf 7748
7fcab871 7749This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7750symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7751alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7752by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7753@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7754@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7755export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7756in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7757symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7758
6b31ad16
DS
7759The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7760name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7761the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7762
b45619c0
NC
7763When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7764library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7765@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7766executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7767
7768With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7769specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7770non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7771
7772If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7773or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7774filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7775
4b5bd4e7
DS
7776The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7777
7778@example
7779EXPORTS
7780 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7781 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7782 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7783@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7784
7785Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7786@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7787@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7788@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7789Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7790@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7791string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7792
7793The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7794
7795@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7796will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7797by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7798linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7799library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7800
7801@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7802The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7803the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7804@code{*_imp__foo}).
7805
7806@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7807well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7808read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7809variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7810the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7811extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7812application will behave unexpectedly.
7813
7814@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7815it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7816symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7817API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7818the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7819
4b5bd4e7
DS
7820See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7821other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7822
7823@cindex creating a DEF file
7824While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7825with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7826
7827@item Using decorations
7828@cindex Using decorations
7829Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7830itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7831declared as:
7832
7833@example
7834__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7835__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7836@end example
7837
7838All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7839any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7840this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7841the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7842
7843Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7844decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7845instead:
7846
7847@example
7848__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7849__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7850@end example
7851
c0065db7
RM
7852This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7853when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7854variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7855code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7856of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7857omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7858@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7859information.
c0065db7 7860@end table
dc8465bf 7861
2ca22b03
NC
7862@cindex automatic data imports
7863@item automatic data imports
7864The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7865by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7866compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7867issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7868code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7869c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7870initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7871decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7872platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7873command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7874The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7875suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7876trigger the feature's use.
7877
c0065db7 7878auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7879additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7880
c0065db7 7881"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7882documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7883
c0065db7
RM
7884The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7885occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7886One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7887below.
7888
7889@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7890For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7891object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7892offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7893field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7894in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7895without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7896The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7897references.
7898
c0065db7
RM
7899The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7900be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7901themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7902runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7903compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7904support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7905run without error on an older system.
7906
c0065db7
RM
7907@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7908enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7909
7910@cindex direct linking to a dll
7911@item direct linking to a dll
7912The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7913including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7914libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7915traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7916libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7917function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7918though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7919storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7920tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7921large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7922
c0065db7 7923Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7924@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7925of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7926perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7927select the dll instead of an import library.
7928
2ca22b03 7929
69da35b5
NC
7930For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7931to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7932
7933@example
45e948fe
NC
7934libxxx.dll.a
7935xxx.dll.a
7936libxxx.a
7937xxx.lib
69da35b5 7938cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7939libxxx.dll
7940xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7941@end example
7942
69da35b5
NC
7943before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7944
c0065db7
RM
7945(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7946where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7947@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7948file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7949@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7950
c0065db7
RM
7951Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7952@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7953was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7954various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7955could coexist on the same machine.
7956
2ca22b03
NC
7957The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7958applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7959libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7960
7961@example
7962bin/
7963 cygxxx.dll
7964lib/
7965 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7966 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7967@end example
7968
c0065db7
RM
7969Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7970done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7971
79721. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7973@example
7974gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7975@end example
2ca22b03 7976
69da35b5
NC
7977However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7978(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7979@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7980not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7981
2ca22b03
NC
79822. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7983directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7984should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7985making the app/dll.
7986
7987@example
7988ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7989@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7990
7991Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7992
7993@example
7994gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7995@end example
69da35b5
NC
7996
7997This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7998perfectly legal
7999
8000@example
8001bin/
8002 cygxxx-5.dll
8003lib/
c0065db7 8004 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8005@end example
8006
dc8465bf 8007Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8008even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8009@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8010
8011Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8012wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8013
80141. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8015work with auto-imported data.
8016
dc8465bf
NC
80172. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8018import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8019symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8020for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8021possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8022
45e948fe
NC
80233. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8024critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8025in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8026stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8027
69da35b5 8028So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8029true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8030a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8031binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8032massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8033requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8034will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8035
c0065db7 8036@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8037@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8038@item adding additional names
8039Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8040A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8041exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8042when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8043import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8044
c0065db7 8045@example
dc8465bf
NC
8046LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8047
8048EXPORTS
c0065db7 8049foo
dc8465bf 8050_foo = foo
c0065db7 8051@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8052
8053The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8054
8055Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8056source code using the "weak" attribute:
8057
c0065db7
RM
8058@example
8059void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8060void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8061@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8062
8063See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8064symbols.
8065
8066@item renaming symbols
8067Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8068kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8069@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8070DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8071created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8072
c0065db7 8073@example
dc8465bf
NC
8074LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8075
8076EXPORTS
8077_foo = foo
c0065db7 8078@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8079
8080The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8081@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8082@end table
dc8465bf 8083
0a5d968e 8084Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 8085unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 8086If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8087@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8088that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8089@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8090renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8091to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8092the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8093In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8094which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8095
8096@cindex weak externals
8097@item weak externals
8098The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8099weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8100defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8101are three variants of weak externals:
8102@itemize
8103@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8104called lazy externals.
8105@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8106This form is not presently implemented.
8107@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8108implemented.
8109@end itemize
8110As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8111are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8112uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8113
8114@cindex aligned common symbols
8115@item aligned common symbols
8116As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8117desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8118the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8119carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8120by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8121tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8122but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8123warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8124
2ca22b03
NC
8125@end table
8126
8127@ifclear GENERIC
8128@lowersections
8129@end ifclear
8130@end ifset
8131
e0001a05
NC
8132@ifset XTENSA
8133@ifclear GENERIC
8134@raisesections
8135@end ifclear
8136
8137@node Xtensa
8138@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8139
8140@cindex Xtensa processors
8141The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8142@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8143specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8144keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8145example, with the command:
8146
8147@smallexample
8148SECTIONS
8149@{
8150 .text : @{
8151 *(.literal .text)
8152 @}
8153@}
8154@end smallexample
8155
8156@noindent
8157@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8158and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8159literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8160interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8161group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8162files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8163and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8164
43cd72b9 8165@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8166@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8167Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8168provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8169is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8170literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8171will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8172location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8173the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8174unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8175@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8176range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8177
8178For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8179to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8180instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8181instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8182instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8183@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8184hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8185By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8186switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8187density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8188instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8189performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8190linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8191a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8192
8193The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8194control the linker:
8195
8196@cindex Xtensa options
8197@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8198@item --size-opt
8199When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8200more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8201no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8202alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8203preserve the correctness of the code.
8204@end table
e0001a05
NC
8205
8206@ifclear GENERIC
8207@lowersections
8208@end ifclear
8209@end ifset
8210
252b5132
RH
8211@ifclear SingleFormat
8212@node BFD
8213@chapter BFD
8214
8215@cindex back end
8216@cindex object file management
8217@cindex object formats available
8218@kindex objdump -i
8219The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8220These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8221object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8222format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8223it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8224associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8225object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8226(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8227list all the formats available for your configuration.
8228
8229@cindex BFD requirements
8230@cindex requirements for BFD
8231As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8232several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8233BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8234formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8235been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8236BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8237may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8238
8239One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8240mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8241useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8242conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8243
8244@menu
8245* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8246@end menu
8247
8248@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8249@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8250@cindex opening object files
8251@include bfdsumm.texi
8252@end ifclear
8253
8254@node Reporting Bugs
8255@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8256@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8257@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8258
ff5dcc92 8259Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8260
8261Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8262it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8263to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8264work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8265@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8266
8267In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8268information that enables us to fix the bug.
8269
8270@menu
8271* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8272* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8273@end menu
8274
8275@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8276@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8277@cindex bug criteria
8278
8279If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8280
8281@itemize @bullet
8282@cindex fatal signal
8283@cindex linker crash
8284@cindex crash of linker
8285@item
8286If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8287@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8288
8289@cindex error on valid input
8290@item
ff5dcc92 8291If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8292
8293@cindex invalid input
8294@item
ff5dcc92 8295If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8296may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8297object files are correct.
8298
8299@item
8300If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8301improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8302@end itemize
8303
8304@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8305@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8306@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8307@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8308
8309A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8310products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8311recommend you contact that organization first.
8312
8313You can find contact information for many support companies and
8314individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8315distribution.
8316
ad22bfe8 8317@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8318Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8319@value{BUGURL}.
8320@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8321
8322The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8323@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8324fact or leave it out, state it!
8325
8326Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8327problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8328assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8329matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8330the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8331location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8332were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8333into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8334specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8335and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8336
8337Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8338the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8339on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8340
8341Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8342bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8343respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8344You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8345
8346To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8347
8348@itemize @bullet
8349@item
ff5dcc92 8350The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8351the @samp{--version} argument.
8352
8353Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8354the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8355
8356@item
ff5dcc92 8357Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8358patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8359
8360@item
8361The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8362version number.
8363
8364@item
ff5dcc92 8365What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8366``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8367
8368@item
8369The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8370observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8371list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8372sufficient.
8373
8374If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8375and then we might not encounter the bug.
8376
8377@item
8378A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8379bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8380provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8381bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8382state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8383requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8384we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8385attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8386
8387If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8388@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8389object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8390@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8391how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8392
8393@item
8394A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8395incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8396
ff5dcc92 8397Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8398will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8399not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8400a chance to make a mistake.
8401
8402Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8403say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8404copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8405C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8406and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8407fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8408you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8409any conclusion from our observations.
8410
8411@item
ff5dcc92 8412If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8413diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8414@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8415If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8416context, not by line number.
8417
8418The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8419sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8420@end itemize
8421
8422Here are some things that are not necessary:
8423
8424@itemize @bullet
8425@item
8426A description of the envelope of the bug.
8427
8428Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8429which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8430changes will not affect it.
8431
8432This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8433will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8434with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8435We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8436
8437Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8438of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8439output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8440less time, and so on.
8441
8442However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8443report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8444
8445@item
8446A patch for the bug.
8447
8448A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8449the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8450a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8451to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8452
ff5dcc92 8453Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8454construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8455through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8456able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8457fixed.
8458
8459And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8460patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8461help us to understand.
8462
8463@item
8464A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8465
8466Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8467things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8468@end itemize
8469
8470@node MRI
8471@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8472@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8473To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8474linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8475alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8476described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8477simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8478@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8479linker commands; these commands are described here.
8480
8481In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8482file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8483features to make use of them.
8484
8485You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8486@samp{-c} command-line option.
8487
8488Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8489command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8490blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8491MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8492issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8493
8494Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8495
8496You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8497lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8498The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8499
8500@table @code
8501@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8502@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8503@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8504Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8505the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8506@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8507your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8508script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8509commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8510input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8511@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8512
8513@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8514@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8515Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8516in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8517
8518@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8519
8520@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8521@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8522Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8523@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8524
8525@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8526@item BASE @var{expression}
8527Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8528absolute addresses) in the output file.
8529
8530@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8531@item CHIP @var{expression}
8532@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8533This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8534
8535@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8536@item END
8537This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8538
8539@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8540@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8541Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8542language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8543
8544@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8545@item
252b5132
RH
8546S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8547
8548@item
8549IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8550
8551@item
8552COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8553@samp{COFF}
8554@end enumerate
8555
8556@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8557@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8558Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8559@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8560
8561The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8562same line, with no change in its effect.
8563
8564@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8565@item LOAD @var{filename}
8566@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8567Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8568same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8569command line.
8570
8571@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8572@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8573@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8574MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8575option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8576
8577@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8578@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8579@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8580Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8581order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8582script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8583sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8584file, in the order specified.
8585
8586@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8587@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8588@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8589@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8590Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8591@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8592
8593@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8594@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8595@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8596@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8597You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8598specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8599If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8600@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8601@end table
8602
793c5807
NC
8603@node GNU Free Documentation License
8604@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8605@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8606
370b66a1
CD
8607@node LD Index
8608@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8609
8610@printindex cp
8611
8612@tex
7ca01ed9 8613% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8614% meantime:
8615\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8616\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8617\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8618\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8619\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8620\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8621\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8622\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8623\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8624% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8625@end tex
8626
252b5132 8627@bye
This page took 1.297671 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.